DS3112N+W [MAXIM]

Framer, CMOS, PBGA256, 27 X 27 MM, 2.13 MM HEIGHT, 1.27 MM PITCH, ROHS COMPLIANT, PLASTIC, BGA-256;
DS3112N+W
型号: DS3112N+W
厂家: MAXIM INTEGRATED PRODUCTS    MAXIM INTEGRATED PRODUCTS
描述:

Framer, CMOS, PBGA256, 27 X 27 MM, 2.13 MM HEIGHT, 1.27 MM PITCH, ROHS COMPLIANT, PLASTIC, BGA-256

电信 电信集成电路
文件: 总133页 (文件大小:1033K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
DS3112  
TEMPE T3/E3 Multiplexer  
3.3V T3/E3 Framer and M13/E13/G.747 Mux  
www.maxim-ic.com  
FEATURES  
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM  
Operates as M13 or E13 Multiplexer or as  
Stand-Alone T3 or E3 Framer  
T1/E1  
T1/E1  
T1/E1  
T1/E1  
Flexible Multiplexer can be Programmed for  
T2/E2  
Multiple Configurations Including:  
M13 Multiplexing (28 T1 Lines into a T3  
Data Stream)  
E13 Multiplexing (16 E1 Lines into an E3  
Data Stream)  
T3/E3  
E1 to T3 Multiplexing (21 E1 Lines into a T3  
Data Stream)  
Two T1/E1 Drop and Insert Ports  
T1/E1  
T1/E1  
T1/E1  
T1/E1  
T2/E2  
DS3112  
Supports T3 C-Bit Parity Mode  
B3ZS/HDB3 Encoder and Decoder  
Generates and Detects T3/E3 Alarms  
Generates and Detects T2/E2 Alarms  
APPLICATIONS  
Integrated HDLC Controller Handles LAPD  
Wide Area Network Access Equipment  
PBXs  
Access Concentrators  
Digital Cross-Connect Systems  
Switches  
Routers  
Optical Multiplexers  
ADMs  
Messages Without Host Intervention  
Integrated FEAC Controller  
Integrated BERT Supports Performance  
Monitoring  
T3/E3 and T1/E1 Diagnostic (Tx to Rx), Line  
(Rx to Tx), and Payload Loopback  
Supported  
Test Equipment  
Nonmultiplexed or Multiplexed 16-Bit  
Control Port (with Optional 8-Bit Mode)  
ORDERING INFORMATION  
3.3V Supply with 5V Tolerant I/O  
Available in 256-Pin 1.27mm Pitch PBGA  
PART  
TEMP RANGE PIN-PACKAGE  
Package  
DS3112  
256 PBGA  
256 PBGA  
256 PBGA  
256 PBGA  
0°C to +70°C  
0°C to +70°C  
-40°C to +85°C  
-40°C to +85°C  
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG Support  
DS3112+  
DS3112N  
DS3112N+  
+Denotes lead-free/RoHS-compliant package.  
Note: Some revisions of this device may incorporate deviations from published specifications known as errata. Multiple revisions of any device  
may be simultaneously available through various sales channels. For information about device errata, click here: www.maxim-ic.com/errata.  
1 of 133  
REV: 092706  
DS3112  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
1
DETAILED DESCRIPTION  
7
1.1  
1.2  
APPLICABLE STANDARDS ..............................................................................................................8  
MAIN DS3112 TEMPE FEATURES................................................................................................9  
1.2.1 General Features ................................................................................................................................... 9  
1.2.2 T3/E3 Framer......................................................................................................................................... 9  
1.2.3 T2/E2 Framer......................................................................................................................................... 9  
1.2.4 HDLC Controller..................................................................................................................................... 9  
1.2.5 FEAC Controller..................................................................................................................................... 9  
1.2.6 BERT.................................................................................................................................................... 10  
1.2.7 Diagnostics........................................................................................................................................... 10  
1.2.8 Control Port.......................................................................................................................................... 10  
1.2.9 Packaging and Power .......................................................................................................................... 10  
2
PIN DESCRIPTION  
14  
2.2  
CPU BUS SIGNAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................19  
T3/E3 RECEIVE FRAMER SIGNAL DESCRIPTION...........................................................................21  
T3/E3 TRANSMIT FORMATTER SIGNAL DESCRIPTION...................................................................23  
LOW-SPEED (T1 OR E1) RECEIVE PORT SIGNAL DESCRIPTION....................................................25  
LOW-SPEED (T1 OR E1) TRANSMIT PORT SIGNAL DESCRIPTION..................................................26  
HIGH-SPEED (T3 OR E3) RECEIVE PORT SIGNAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................28  
HIGH-SPEED (T3 OR E3) TRANSMIT PORT SIGNAL DESCRIPTION .................................................28  
JTAG SIGNAL DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................29  
SUPPLY, TEST, RESET, AND MODE SIGNAL DESCRIPTION............................................................29  
2.3  
2.4  
2.5  
2.6  
2.7  
2.8  
2.9  
2.10  
3
4
MEMORY MAP  
MASTER DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND STATUS/INTERRUPT  
31  
33  
4.1  
4.2  
4.3  
MASTER RESET AND ID REGISTER DESCRIPTION.........................................................................33  
MASTER CONFIGURATION REGISTERS DESCRIPTION ...................................................................34  
MASTER STATUS AND INTERRUPT REGISTER DESCRIPTION..........................................................38  
4.3.1 Status Registers................................................................................................................................... 38  
4.3.2 MSR ..................................................................................................................................................... 39  
4.4  
TEST REGISTER DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................47  
5
T3/E3 FRAMER  
48  
5.1  
5.2  
5.3  
5.4  
5.5  
5.6  
T3/E3 LINE LOOPBACK ...............................................................................................................48  
T3/E3 DIAGNOSTIC LOOPBACK ...................................................................................................48  
T3/E3 PAYLOAD LOOPBACK........................................................................................................48  
T3/E3 FRAMER CONTROL REGISTER DESCRIPTION .....................................................................49  
T3/E3 FRAMER STATUS AND INTERRUPT REGISTER DESCRIPTION ...............................................53  
T3/E3 PERFORMANCE ERROR COUNTERS ..................................................................................59  
6
7
M13/E13/G.747 MULTIPLEXER AND T2/E2/G.747 FRAME  
62  
6.1  
6.2  
6.3  
6.4  
T1/E1 AIS GENERATION.............................................................................................................62  
T2/E2/G.747 FRAMER CONTROL REGISTER DESCRIPTION ..........................................................62  
T2/E2/G.747 FRAMER STATUS AND INTERRUPT REGISTER DESCRIPTION ....................................64  
T1/E1 AIS GENERATION CONTROL REGISTER DESCRIPTION .......................................................68  
T1/E1 LOOPBACK AND DROP AND INSERT FUNCTIONALITY  
70  
7.1  
7.2  
7.3  
7.4  
7.5  
T1/E1 LINE LOOPBACK ...............................................................................................................70  
T1/E1 DIAGNOSTIC LOOPBACK ...................................................................................................70  
T1 LINE LOOPBACK COMMAND....................................................................................................70  
T1/E1 DROP AND INSERT............................................................................................................70  
T1/E1 LOOPBACK CONTROL REGISTER DESCRIPTION .................................................................71  
2 of 133  
DS3112  
7.6  
7.7  
T1 LINE LOOPBACK COMMAND STATUS REGISTER DESCRIPTION .................................................75  
T1/E1 DROP AND INSERT CONTROL REGISTER DESCRIPTION ......................................................76  
8
9
BERT  
78  
8.1  
BERT REGISTER DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................78  
HDLC CONTROLLER  
87  
9.1  
9.2  
9.2  
9.3  
RECEIVE OPERATION..................................................................................................................87  
TRANSMIT OPERATION................................................................................................................87  
HDLC CONTROL AND FIFO REGISTER DESCRIPTION ..................................................................88  
HDLC STATUS AND INTERRUPT REGISTER DESCRIPTION.............................................................91  
10 FEAC CONTROLLER  
96  
10.1  
10.2  
FEAC CONTROL REGISTER DESCRIPTION...................................................................................96  
FEAC STATUS REGISTER DESCRIPTION......................................................................................98  
11 JTAG  
99  
11.1  
TAP CONTROLLER STATE MACHINE DESCRIPTION ....................................................................100  
Test-Logic-Reset ........................................................................................................................... 101  
11.1.1  
11.1.2  
11.1.3  
11.1.4  
11.1.5  
11.1.6  
11.1.7  
11.1.8  
11.1.9  
Run-Test-Idle................................................................................................................................. 101  
Select-DR-Scan............................................................................................................................. 101  
Capture-DR.................................................................................................................................... 101  
Shift-DR ......................................................................................................................................... 101  
Exit1-DR......................................................................................................................................... 101  
Pause-DR ...................................................................................................................................... 101  
Exit2-DR......................................................................................................................................... 101  
Update-DR..................................................................................................................................... 101  
11.1.10 Select-IR-Scan............................................................................................................................... 101  
11.1.11 Capture-IR ..................................................................................................................................... 102  
11.1.12 Shift-IR........................................................................................................................................... 102  
11.1.13 Exit1-IR .......................................................................................................................................... 102  
11.1.14 Pause-IR........................................................................................................................................ 102  
11.1.15 Exit2-IR .......................................................................................................................................... 102  
11.1.16 Update-IR....................................................................................................................................... 102  
11.2  
INSTRUCTION REGISTER AND INSTRUCTIONS .............................................................................103  
11.2.1  
SAMPLE/PRELOAD...................................................................................................................... 103  
EXTEST......................................................................................................................................... 103  
BYPASS......................................................................................................................................... 103  
IDCODE......................................................................................................................................... 103  
HIGHZ............................................................................................................................................ 103  
CLAMP........................................................................................................................................... 104  
11.2.2  
11.2.3  
11.2.4  
11.2.5  
11.2.6  
11.3  
11.3.1  
11.3.2  
11.3.3  
TEST REGISTERS......................................................................................................................104  
Bypass Register............................................................................................................................. 104  
Identification Register .................................................................................................................... 104  
Boundary Scan Register................................................................................................................ 104  
12 DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS  
13 AC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS  
14 APPLICATIONS AND STANDARDS OVERVIEW  
109  
110  
121  
14.1  
14.2  
14.3  
14.4  
14.5  
14.6  
14.7  
APPLICATION EXAMPLES...........................................................................................................121  
M13 BASICS.............................................................................................................................122  
T2 FRAMING STRUCTURE .........................................................................................................123  
M12 MULTIPLEXING..................................................................................................................123  
T3 FRAMING STRUCTURE .........................................................................................................125  
M23 MULTIPLEXING..................................................................................................................125  
C-BIT PARITY MODE .................................................................................................................126  
3 of 133  
DS3112  
14.8  
14.9  
14.10  
14.11  
14.12  
E13 BASICS .............................................................................................................................128  
E2 FRAMING STRUCTURE AND E12 MULTIPLEXING....................................................................129  
E3 FRAMING STRUCTURE AND E23 MULTIPLEXING................................................................129  
G.747 BASICS......................................................................................................................131  
G.747 FRAMING STRUCTURE AND E12 MULTIPLEXING...........................................................132  
15 PACKAGE INFORMATION  
133  
15.1  
256-BALL PBGA (56-G6002-001)............................................................................................133  
4 of 133  
DS3112  
LIST OF FIGURES  
Figure 1-1. DS3112 Framer and Multiplexer Block Diagram (T3 Mode)................................................................... 11  
Figure 1-2. DS3112 Framer and Multiplexer Block Diagram (E3 Mode)................................................................... 12  
Figure 1-3. DS3112 Framer and Multiplexer Block Diagram (G.747 Mode) ............................................................. 13  
Figure 2-1. T3/E3 Receive Framer Timing ................................................................................................................ 22  
Figure 2-2. T3/E3 Transmit Formatter Timing ........................................................................................................... 24  
Figure 4-1. Event Status Bit....................................................................................................................................... 38  
Figure 4-2. Alarm Status Bit....................................................................................................................................... 38  
Figure 4-3. Real-Time Status Bit ............................................................................................................................... 39  
Figure 4-4. BERT Status Bit Flow.............................................................................................................................. 41  
Figure 4-5. HDLC Status Bit Flow.............................................................................................................................. 42  
Figure 4-6. T2E2SR1 Status Bit Flow........................................................................................................................ 43  
Figure 4-7. T2E2SR2 Status Bit Flow........................................................................................................................ 44  
Figure 4-8. T1LB Status Bit Flow............................................................................................................................... 44  
Figure 4-9. T3E3SR Status Bit Flow.......................................................................................................................... 45  
Figure 5-1. T3E3SR Status Bit Flow.......................................................................................................................... 54  
Figure 6-1. T2E2SR1 Status Bit Flow........................................................................................................................ 65  
Figure 6-2. T2E2SR2 Status Bit Flow........................................................................................................................ 66  
Figure 7-1. T1LBSR1 and T1LBSR2 Status Bit Flow................................................................................................ 76  
Figure 8-1. BERT Status Bit Flow.............................................................................................................................. 86  
Figure 9-1. HSR Status Bit Flow................................................................................................................................ 94  
Figure 11-1. JTAG Block Diagram............................................................................................................................. 99  
Figure 11-2. TAP Controller State Machine............................................................................................................. 100  
Figure 13-1. Low-Speed (T1 and E1) Port AC Timing Diagram.............................................................................. 111  
Figure 13-2. High-Speed (T3 and E3) Port AC Timing Diagram............................................................................. 112  
Figure 13-3. Framer (T3 and E3) Port AC Timing Diagram..................................................................................... 113  
Figure 13-4. Intel Read Cycle (Nonmultiplexed)...................................................................................................... 115  
Figure 13-5. Intel Write Cycle (Nonmultiplexed)...................................................................................................... 115  
Figure 13-6. Motorola Read Cycle (Nonmultiplexed) .............................................................................................. 116  
Figure 13-7. Motorola Write Cycle (Nonmultiplexed)............................................................................................... 116  
Figure 13-8. Intel Read Cycle (Multiplexed) ............................................................................................................ 117  
Figure 13-9. Intel Write Cycle (Multiplexed) ............................................................................................................ 117  
Figure 13-10. Motorola Read Cycle (Multiplexed)................................................................................................... 118  
Figure 13-11. Motorola Write Cycle (Multiplexed) ................................................................................................... 118  
Figure 13-12. JTAG Test Port Interface AC Timing Diagram.................................................................................. 119  
Figure 13-13. Reset and Manual Error Counter/Insert AC Timing Diagram............................................................ 120  
Figure 14-1. Channelized T3/E3 Application........................................................................................................... 121  
Figure 14-2. Unchannelized Dual T3/E3 Application............................................................................................... 122  
Figure 14-3. T2 M-Frame Structure......................................................................................................................... 124  
Figure 14-4. T2 Stuff Block Structure ...................................................................................................................... 124  
Figure 14-5. T3 M-Frame Structure......................................................................................................................... 127  
Figure 14-6. T3 Stuff Block Structure ...................................................................................................................... 128  
Figure 14-7. E2 Frame Structure............................................................................................................................. 130  
Figure 14-8. E3 Frame Structure............................................................................................................................. 130  
Figure 14-9. G.747 Frame Structure........................................................................................................................ 132  
5 of 133  
DS3112  
LIST OF TABLES  
Table 2-1. Pin Naming Convention............................................................................................................................ 14  
Table 2-2. Pin Description ......................................................................................................................................... 14  
Table 2-3. Mode Select Decode ................................................................................................................................ 30  
Table 3-1. Memory Map............................................................................................................................................. 31  
Table 5-1. T3 Alarm Criteria ...................................................................................................................................... 56  
Table 5-2. E3 Alarm Criteria ...................................................................................................................................... 57  
Table 6-1. T2 Alarm Criteria ...................................................................................................................................... 67  
Table 6-2. E2 Alarm Criteria ...................................................................................................................................... 67  
Table 6-3. G.747 Alarm Criteria................................................................................................................................. 67  
Table 11-1. Instruction Codes.................................................................................................................................. 103  
Table 11-2. Boundary Scan Control Bits ................................................................................................................. 104  
Table 12-1. Recommended DC Operating Conditions............................................................................................ 109  
Table 12-2. DC Characteristics................................................................................................................................ 109  
Table 13-1. AC Characteristics—Low-Speed (T1 and E1) Ports ............................................................................ 110  
Table 13-2. AC Characteristics—High-Speed (T3 and E3) Ports ........................................................................... 112  
Table 13-3. AC Characteristics–Framer (T3 and E3) Ports .................................................................................... 113  
Table 13-4. AC Characteristics—CPU Bus (Multiplexed and Nonmultiplexed) ...................................................... 114  
Table 13-5. AC Characteristics—JTAG Test Port Interface.................................................................................... 119  
Table 13-6. AC Characteristics—Reset and Manual Error Counter/Insert Signals................................................. 120  
Table 14-1. T Carrier Rates..................................................................................................................................... 122  
Table 14-2. T2 Overhead Bit Assignments.............................................................................................................. 123  
Table 14-3. T3 Overhead Bit Assignments.............................................................................................................. 125  
Table 14-4. C-Bit Assignment for C-Bit Parity Mode ............................................................................................... 126  
Table 14-5. E Carrier Rates..................................................................................................................................... 128  
Table 14-6. G.747 Carrier Rates ............................................................................................................................. 131  
6 of 133  
DS3112  
1 DETAILED DESCRIPTION  
The DS3112 TEMPE (T3 E3 MultiPlexEr) device can be used either as a multiplexer or a T3/E3 framer.  
When the device is used as a multiplexer, it can be operated in one of three modes:  
M13—Multiplex 28 T1 lines into a T3 data stream  
E13—Multiplex 16 E1 lines into an E3 data stream  
G.747—Multiplex 21 E1 lines into a T3 data stream  
See Figure 1-1, Figure 1-2, and Figure 1-3 for block diagrams of these three modes. In each of the block  
diagrams, the receive section is at the bottom and the transmit section is at the top. The receive path is  
defined as incoming T3/E3 data and the transmit path is defined as outgoing T3/E3 data. When the device  
is operated solely as a T3 or E3 framer, the multiplexer portion of the device is disabled and the raw  
T3/E3 payload will be output at the FRD output and input at the FTD input. See Figure 1-1 and  
Figure 1-2 for details.  
In the receive path, raw T3/E3 data is clocked into the device (either in a bipolar or unipolar fashion) with  
the HRCLK at the HRPOS and HRNEG inputs. The data is then framed by the T3/E3 framer and passed  
through the two-step demultiplexing process to yield the resultant T1 and E1 data streams, which are  
output at the LRCLK and LRDAT outputs. In the transmit path, the reverse occurs. The T1 and E1 data  
streams are input to the device at the LTCLK and LTDAT inputs. The device will sample these inputs  
and then multiplex the T1 and E1 data streams through a two-step multiplexing process to yield the  
resultant T3 or E3 data stream. Then this data stream is passed through the T3/E3 formatter to have the  
framing overhead added, and the final data stream to be transmitted is output at the HTPOS and HTNEG  
outputs using the HTCLK output.  
The DS3112 has been designed to meet all of the latest telecommunications standards. Section 1.1 lists all  
of the applicable standards for the device.  
The TEMPE device has a number of advanced features such as:  
The ability to drop and insert up to two T1 or E1 ports  
An on-board HDLC controller with 256-byte buffers  
An on-board Bit Error Rate Tester (BERT)  
Advanced diagnostics to create and detect many different types of errors  
See Section 1.2 for a complete list of main features within the device.  
7 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
1.1 Applicable Standards  
1) American National Standard for Telecommunications - ANSI T1.107 – 1995 “Digital Hierarchy -  
Formats Specification”  
2) American National Standard for Telecommunications - ANSI T1.231 - 199X – Draft “Digital  
Hierarchy - Layer 1 In-Service Digital Transmission Performance Monitoring”  
3) American National Standard for Telecommunications - ANSI T1.231 – 1993 “Digital Hierarchy -  
Layer 1 In-Service Digital Transmission Performance Monitoring”  
4) American National Standard for Telecommunications - ANSI T1.404 – 1994 “Network-to-Customer  
Installation – DS3 Metallic Interface Specification”  
5) American National Standard for Telecommunications - ANSI T1.403 – 1999 “Network and Customer  
Installation Interfaces – DS1 Electrical Interface”  
6) American National Standard for Telecommunications - ANSI T1.102 – 1993 “Digital Hierarchy –  
Electrical Interfaces”  
7) Bell Communications Research - TR-TSY-000009, Issue 1, May 1986 “Asynchronous Digital  
Multiplexes Requirements and Objectives”  
8) Bell Communications Research - TR-TSY-000191, Issue 1, May 1986 “Alarm Indication Signal  
Requirements and Objectives”  
9) Bellcore - GR-499-CORE, Issue 1, December 1995 “Transport Systems Generic Requirements  
(TSGR): Common Requirements”  
10) Bellcore - GR-820-CORE, Issue 1, November 1994 “Generic Digital Transmission Surveillance”  
11) Network Working Group Request for Comments - RFC1407, January, 1993 “Definition of Managed  
Objects for the DS3/E3 Interface Type”  
12) International Telecommunication Union (ITU) G.703, 1991 “Physical/Electrical Characteristics of  
Hierarchical Digital Interfaces  
13) International Telecommunication Union (ITU) G.823, March 1993 “The Control of Jitter and Wander  
Within Digital Networks Which are Based on the 2048kbps Hierarchy”  
14) International Telecommunication Union (ITU) G.742, 1993 “Second Order Digital Multiplex  
Equipment Operating at 8448 kbps and Using Positive Justification”  
15) International Telecommunication Union (ITU) G.747, 1993 “Second Order Digital Multiplex  
Equipment Operating at 6312 kbps and Multiplexing Three Tributaries at 2048kbps”  
16) International Telecommunication Union (ITU) G.751, 1993 “Digital Multiplex Equipments Operating  
at the Third Order Bit Rate of 34368kbps and Using Positive Justification”  
17) International Telecommunication Union (ITU) G.775, November 1994 “Loss Of Signal (LOS) and  
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Defect Detection and Clearance Criteria”  
18) International Telecommunication Union (ITU) O.151, October 1992 “Error Performance Measuring  
Equipment Operating at the Primary Rate And Above”  
19) International Telecommunication Union (ITU) O.153, October 1992 “Basic Parameters for the  
Measurement of Error Performance at Bit Rates Below the Primary Rate”  
20) International Telecommunication Union (ITU) O.161, 1984 “In-Service Code Violation Monitors for  
Digital Systems”  
8 of 133  
 
DS3112  
1.2 Main DS3112 TEMPE Features  
1.2.1 General Features  
Can be operated as a standalone T3 or E3 framer without any M13 or E13 multiplexing  
T1/E1 FIFOs in the receive direction provide T1/E1 demultiplexed clocks with very little jitter  
Two T1/E1 drop and insert ports  
B3ZS/HDB3 encoder and decoder  
T3 C-Bit Parity mode  
All the receive T1/E1 ports can be clocked out on a common clock  
All the transmit T1/E1 ports can be clocked in on a common clock  
Generates gapped clocks that can be used as demand clocks in unchannelized T3/E3 applications  
T1/E1 ports can be configured into a “loop-timed” mode  
T3/E3 port interfaces can be either bipolar or unipolar  
The clock, data, and control signals can be inverted to allow a glueless interface to other device  
Loss of transmit and receive clock detect  
1.2.2 T3/E3 Framer  
Generates T3/E3 Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) alarms  
Transmit framer pass through mode  
Generates T3 idle signal  
Detects the following T3/E3 alarms and events: Loss Of Signal (LOS), Loss Of Frame (LOF), Alarm  
Indication Signal (AIS), Remote Alarm Indication (RAI), T3 idle signal, Change Of Frame Alignment  
(COFA), B3ZS and HDB3 codewords being received, Severely Errored Framing Event (SEFE), and  
T3 Application ID status indication  
1.2.3 T2/E2 Framer  
Generates T2/E2 Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) alarms  
Generates Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) for T1/E1 data streams in both the transmit and receive  
directions  
Detects the following T2/E2 alarms and events: Loss Of Frame (LOF), Alarm Indication Signal  
(AIS), and Remote Alarm Indication (RAI)  
Detects T1 line loopback commands (C3 bit is the inverse of C1 and C2)  
Generates T1 line loopback commands  
1.2.4 HDLC Controller  
Designed to handle multiple LAPD messages without Host intervention  
256 byte receive and transmit buffers are large enough to handle the three T3 messages (Path ID, Idle  
Signal ID, and Test Signal ID) that are sent and received once a second which means the Host only  
needs to access the HDLC Controller once a second  
Handles all of the normal Layer 2 tasks such as zero stuffing/destuffing, CRC generation/checking,  
abort generation/checking, flag generation/detection, and byte alignment  
Programmable high and low watermarks for the FIFO  
HDLC Controller can be used in either the T3 C-Bit Parity Mode or in the Sn Bits in the E3 Mode  
1.2.5 FEAC Controller  
Designed to handle multiple FEAC codewords without Host intervention  
Receive FEAC automatically validates incoming codewords and stores them in a 4-byte FIFO  
Transmit FEAC can be configured to send either one codeword, or constant codewords, or two  
different codewords back-to-back to create T3 Line Loopback commands  
FEAC Controller can be used in either the T3 C-Bit Parity Mode or in the Sn Bits in the E3 Mode  
9 of 133  
 
DS3112  
1.2.6 BERT  
Can generate and detect the pseudorandom patterns of 27 - 1, 211 - 1, 215 - 1 and QRSS as well as  
repetitive patterns from 1 to 32 bits in length  
BERT is a global chip resource that can be used either in the T3/E3 data path or in any one of the T1  
or E1 data paths  
Large error counter (24 bits) allows testing to proceed for long periods without Host intervention  
Errors can be inserted into the generated BERT patterns for diagnostic purposes  
1.2.7 Diagnostics  
T3/E3 and T1/E1 diagnostic loopbacks (transmit to receive)  
T3/E3 and T1/E1 line loopbacks (receive to transmit)  
T3/E3 payload loopback  
T3/E3 errors counters for: BiPolar Violations (BPV), Code Violations (CV), Loss Of Frame (LOF),  
framing bit errors (F, M or FAS), EXcessive Zeros (EXZ), T3 Parity bits, T3 C-Bit Parity, and Far  
End Block Errors (FEBE)  
Error counters can be either updated automatically on one second boundaries as timed by the DS3112  
or via software control or via an external hardware pulse  
Can insert the following T3/E3 errors: BiPolar Violations (BPV), EXcessive Zeros (EXZ), T3 Parity  
bits, T3 C-Bit Parity, framing bit errors (F, M, or FAS)  
Inserted errors can be either controlled via software or via an external hardware pulse  
Generates T2/E2 Loss Of Frame (LOF)  
1.2.8 Control Port  
Nonmultiplexed or multiplexed 16-bit control port (with an optional 8-bit mode)  
Intel and Motorola Bus compatible  
1.2.9 Packaging and Power  
3.3V low-power CMOS with 5V tolerant inputs and outputs  
256-pin plastic BGA package (27mm x 27mm)  
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG test port  
10 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Figure 1-1. DS3112 Framer and Multiplexer Block Diagram (T3 Mode)  
FTMEI  
FTDEN  
FTD  
FTCLK  
FTSOF  
Signal  
Inversion  
Control  
HRCLK  
Loss Of Transmit Clock  
7 to 1  
Mux  
4 to 1  
Mux  
T3  
Formatter  
Sync  
Control  
T2  
For-  
LTDAT  
LTCLK  
1
2
matter  
LTDAT  
LTCLK  
LTDAT  
LTCLK  
BERT Mux  
LTDAT  
LTCLK  
7
Transmit  
BERT  
1 of 7  
LTDATA  
LTCLKA  
LTDATB  
LTCLKB  
1 of 28  
HDLC Controller  
with 256 Byte  
Transmit  
Receive  
LTCCLK  
Buffer  
from  
other  
ports  
FEAC Controller  
LRDATA  
LRCLKA  
from  
other  
ports  
Receive  
BERT  
LRDATB  
LRCLKB  
T3  
Framer  
1 to 7  
Demux  
1 to 4  
Demux  
BERT Mux  
1
2
LRDAT  
LRCLK  
T2  
Framer  
LRDAT  
LRCLK  
LRDAT  
LRCLK  
7
LRDAT  
LRCLK  
1 of 7  
LRCCLK  
FRSOF  
FRCLK  
FRD  
Error  
Counters  
Signal  
Inversion  
Control  
FRDEN  
FRLOS  
FRLOF  
JTDI  
JTRST*  
JTCLK  
JTMS  
JTAG  
Test  
Block  
CPU Interface & Global Configuration  
(Routed to All Blocks)  
JTDO  
CA0 to CD0 to CWR* CRD* CCS* CALE CIM CINT* CMS TEST RST*  
FRMECU  
T3E3MS G747E  
CA7  
CD15 (CR/W*) (CDS*)  
(tied low) (tied low)  
11 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
Figure 1-2. DS3112 Framer and Multiplexer Block Diagram (E3 Mode)  
FTMEI  
FTDEN  
FTD  
FTCLK  
FTSOF  
Signal  
Inversion  
Control  
HRCLK  
Loss Of Transmit Clock  
4 to 1  
Mux  
4 to 1  
Mux  
E3  
Formatter  
Sync  
Control  
E2  
For-  
matter  
LTDAT  
LTCLK  
1
LTDAT  
LTCLK  
2
3
LTDAT  
LTCLK  
BERT Mux  
LTDAT  
LTCLK  
4
Transmit  
BERT  
1 of 4  
LTDATA  
LTCLKA  
LTDATB  
LTCLKB  
1 of 16  
HDLC Controller  
with 256 Byte  
Transmit  
Receive  
LTCCLK  
Buffer  
from  
other  
ports  
FEAC Controller  
LRDATA  
LRCLKA  
from  
other  
ports  
Receive  
BERT  
LRDATB  
LRCLKB  
E3  
Framer  
1 to 4  
Demux  
1 to 4  
Demux  
BERT Mux  
1
2
LRDAT  
LRCLK  
E2  
Framer  
LRDAT  
LRCLK  
3
LRDAT  
LRCLK  
4
LRDAT  
LRCLK  
1 of 4  
LRCCLK  
FRSOF  
FRCLK  
FRD  
Error  
Counters  
Signal  
Inversion  
Control  
FRDEN  
FRLOS  
FRLOF  
JTDI  
JTRST*  
JTCLK  
JTMS  
JTAG  
Test  
Block  
CPU Interface & Global Configuration  
(Routed to All Blocks)  
JTDO  
CA0 to CD0 to CWR* CRD* CCS* CALE CIM CINT* CMS TEST RST*  
FRMECU  
T3E3MS G747E  
(tied high) (tied low)  
CA7  
CD15 (CR/W*) (CDS*)  
12 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
Figure 1-3. DS3112 Framer and Multiplexer Block Diagram (G.747 Mode)  
FTMEI  
FTDEN  
FTD  
FTCLK  
FTSOF  
Signal  
Inversion  
Control  
HRCLK  
Loss Of Transmit Clock  
7 to 1  
Mux  
3 to 1  
Mux  
T3  
Formatter  
Sync  
Control  
G747  
For-  
1
2
matter  
LTDAT  
LTCLK  
LTDAT  
LTCLK  
BERT Mux  
LTDAT  
LTCLK  
7
Transmit  
BERT  
1 of 7  
LTDATA  
LTCLKA  
LTDATB  
LTCLKB  
1 of 21  
HDLC Controller  
with 256 Byte  
Transmit  
Receive  
LTCCLK  
Buffer  
from  
other  
ports  
FEAC Controller  
LRDATA  
LRCLKA  
from  
other  
ports  
Receive  
BERT  
LRDATB  
LRCLKB  
T3  
Framer  
1 to 7  
Demux  
1 to 3  
Demux  
BERT Mux  
1
2
LRDAT  
LRCLK  
G747  
Framer  
LRDAT  
LRCLK  
LRDAT  
LRCLK  
7
1 of 7  
LRCCLK  
FRSOF  
FRCLK  
FRD  
Error  
Counters  
Signal  
Inversion  
Control  
FRDEN  
FRLOS  
FRLOF  
JTDI  
JTRST*  
JTCLK  
JTMS  
JTAG  
Test  
Block  
CPU Interface & Global Configuration  
(Routed to All Blocks)  
JTDO  
FRMECU CA0 to CD0 to CWR* CRD* CCS* CALE CIM CINT* CMS TEST RST* T3E3MS G747E  
CA7 CD15 (CR/W*) (CDS*) (tied low) (tied high)  
13 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
2 PIN DESCRIPTION  
This section describes the input and output signals on the DS3112. Signal names follow a convention that  
is shown in Table 2-1. Table 2-2 lists all the signals, their signal type, description, and pin location.  
Table 2-1. Pin Naming Convention  
FIRST  
LETTERS  
SIGNAL CATEGORY  
SECTION  
C
FR  
FT  
LR  
LT  
HR  
HT  
J
CPU/Host Control Access Port  
T3/E3 Receive Framer  
T3/E3 Transmit Formatter  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Port  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Port  
High-Speed (T3 or E3) Receive Port  
High-Speed (T3 or E3) Transmit Port  
JTAG Test Port  
2.2  
2.3  
2.4  
2.5  
2.6  
2.7  
2.8  
2.9  
Table 2-2. Pin Description  
PIN  
C7  
H3  
H2  
H1  
J4  
J3  
J2  
J1  
K2  
C4  
C2  
D2  
D3  
E4  
C1  
D1  
E3  
E2  
E1  
F3  
G4  
F2  
F1  
G3  
G2  
G1  
B3  
A2  
B2  
NAME  
CALE  
CA0  
CA1  
CA2  
CA3  
CA4  
CA5  
CA6  
CA7  
CCS  
CD0  
CD1  
CD2  
CD3  
CD4  
CD5  
CD6  
CD7  
CD8  
CD9  
CD10  
CD11  
CD12  
CD13  
CD14  
CD15  
CIM  
CINT  
CMS  
TYPE  
I
FUNCTION  
CPU Bus Address Latch Enable  
CPU Bus Address Bit 0 (LSB)  
CPU Bus Address Bit 1  
CPU Bus Address Bit 2  
CPU Bus Address Bit 3  
CPU Bus Address Bit 4  
CPU Bus Address Bit 5  
CPU Bus Address Bit 6  
CPU Bus Address Bit 7 (MSB)  
CPU Bus Chip Select (Active Low)  
CPU Bus Data Bit 0 (LSB)  
CPU Bus Data Bit 1  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I
CPU Bus Data Bit 2  
CPU Bus Data Bit 3  
CPU Bus Data Bit 4  
CPU Bus Data Bit 5  
CPU Bus Data Bit 6  
CPU Bus Data Bit 7  
CPU Bus Data Bit 8  
CPU Bus Data Bit 9  
CPU Bus Data Bit 10  
CPU Bus Data Bit 11  
CPU Bus Data Bit 12  
CPU Bus Data Bit 13  
CPU Bus Data Bit 14  
CPU Bus Data Bit 15 (MSB)  
CPU Bus Intel/Motorola Bus Select, 0 = Intel, 1 = Motorola  
CPU Bus Interrupt  
O
I
CPU Bus Mode Select, 0 = 16 Bit, 1 = 8 Bit Mode  
14 of 133  
 
 
 
DS3112  
PIN  
D5  
NAME  
CRD(CDS)  
CWR  
(CR/W)  
FRCLK  
FRD  
FRDEN  
FRLOF  
FRLOS  
FRMECU  
FRSOF  
FTCLK  
FTD  
FTDEN  
FTMEI  
FTSOF  
TYPE  
FUNCTION  
CPU Bus Read Enable (CPU Bus Data Strobe)  
I
A3  
I
CPU Bus Write Enable (CPU Bus Read/Write Select)  
A9  
B9  
C9  
C8  
B8  
O
O
O
O
O
I
O
I
I
Receive Framer (T3 or E3) Clock Output  
Receive Framer (T3 or E3) Data Output  
Receive Framer (T3 or E3) Data Enable Output  
Receive Framer (T3 or E3) Loss Of Frame Output  
Receive Framer (T3 or E3) Loss Of Signal Output  
Receive Framer (T3 or E3) Manual Error Counter Update  
Receive Framer (T3 or E3) Start Of Frame Pulse  
Transmit Framer (T3 or E3) Clock Input  
A7  
A8  
A10  
B10  
C10  
C11  
A11  
Transmit Framer (T3 or E3) Data Input  
O
I
I/O  
Transmit Framer (T3 or E3) Data Enable Output  
Transmit Framer (T3 or E3) Manual Error Insert Pulse  
Transmit Framer (T3 or E3) Start Of Frame Pulse  
G.747 Mode Enable, 0 = Normal T3 Mode, 1 = G.747  
Mode  
B6  
G.747E  
I
A13  
C12  
HRCLK  
HRNEG  
I
I
High-Speed (T3 or E3) Port Receive Clock Input  
High-Speed (T3 or E3) Port Receive Negative Data Input  
High-Speed (T3 or E3) Port Receive Positive or NRZ Data  
Input  
High-Speed (T3 or E3) Port Transmit Clock Output  
High-Speed (T3 or E3) Port Transmit Negative Data  
Output  
B13  
B14  
A14  
HRPOS  
HTCLK  
HTNEG  
I
O
O
High-Speed (T3 or E3) Port Transmit Positive or NRZ Data  
Output  
C14  
HTPOS  
O
D7  
B5  
A4  
A5  
C6  
JTCLK  
JTDI  
JTDO  
JTMS  
JTRST  
I
I
O
I
I
JTAG IEEE 1149.1 Test Serial Clock  
JTAG IEEE 1149.1 Test Serial Data Input  
JTAG IEEE 1149.1 Test Serial Data Output  
JTAG IEEE 1149.1 Test Mode Select  
JTAG IEEE 1149.1 Test Reset (Active Low)  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Port Common Receive Clock Input  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 1  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 2  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 3  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 4  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 5  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 6  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 7  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 8  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 9  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 10  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 11  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 12  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 13  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 14  
G20  
N2  
R1  
LRCCLK  
LRCLK1  
LRCLK2  
LRCLK3  
LRCLK4  
LRCLK5  
LRCLK6  
LRCLK7  
LRCLK8  
LRCLK9  
LRCLK10  
LRCLK11  
LRCLK12  
LRCLK13  
LRCLK14  
I
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
R3  
U2  
V2  
Y2  
Y3  
Y5  
Y6  
V8  
V9  
V10  
V11  
Y13  
15 of 133  
DS3112  
PIN  
W14  
Y16  
Y17  
U16  
V18  
V19  
V20  
T20  
R20  
N18  
M18  
L18  
K18  
H20  
K1  
M1  
N1  
P2  
P4  
T3  
U3  
W3  
U5  
W5  
W6  
Y7  
NAME  
TYPE  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
FUNCTION  
LRCLK15  
LRCLK16  
LRCLK17  
LRCLK18  
LRCLK19  
LRCLK20  
LRCLK21  
LRCLK22  
LRCLK23  
LRCLK24  
LRCLK25  
LRCLK26  
LRCLK27  
LRCLK28  
LRCLKA  
LRCLKB  
LRDAT1  
LRDAT2  
LRDAT3  
LRDAT4  
LRDAT5  
LRDAT6  
LRDAT7  
LRDAT8  
LRDAT9  
LRDAT10  
LRDAT11  
LRDAT12  
LRDAT13  
LRDAT14  
LRDAT15  
LRDAT16  
LRDAT17  
LRDAT18  
LRDAT19  
LRDAT20  
LRDAT21  
LRDAT22  
LRDAT23  
LRDAT24  
LRDAT25  
LRDAT26  
LRDAT27  
LRDAT28  
LRDATA  
LRDATB  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 15  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 16  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 17  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 18  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 19  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 20  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 21  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 22  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 23  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 24  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 25  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 26  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 27  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Port 28  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Drop Port A  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Clock from Drop Port B  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 1  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 2  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 3  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 4  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 5  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 6  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 7  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 8  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 9  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 10  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 11  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 12  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 13  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 14  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 15  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 16  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 17  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 18  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 19  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 20  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 21  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 22  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 23  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 24  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 25  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 26  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 27  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Port 28  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Drop Port A  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Data from Drop Port B  
U9  
W10  
W11  
V12  
Y14  
W15  
W16  
Y18  
Y19  
W20  
T17  
T19  
R19  
P20  
M17  
L19  
K19  
J18  
K3  
L3  
16 of 133  
DS3112  
PIN  
G19  
P1  
R2  
U1  
T4  
V3  
V4  
V5  
NAME  
LTCCLK  
LTCLK1  
LTCLK2  
LTCLK3  
LTCLK4  
LTCLK5  
LTCLK6  
LTCLK7  
LTCLK8  
LTCLK9  
LTCLK10  
LTCLK11  
LTCLK12  
LTCLK13  
LTCLK14  
LTCLK15  
LTCLK16  
LTCLK17  
LTCLK18  
LTCLK19  
LTCLK20  
LTCLK21  
LTCLK22  
LTCLK23  
LTCLK24  
LTCLK25  
LTCLK26  
LTCLK27  
LTCLK28  
LTCLKA  
LTCLKB  
LTDAT1  
LTDAT2  
LTDAT3  
LTDAT4  
LTDAT5  
LTDAT6  
LTDAT7  
LTDAT8  
LTDAT9  
LTDAT10  
LTDAT11  
LTDAT12  
LTDAT13  
LTDAT14  
LTDAT15  
TYPE  
FUNCTION  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Port Common Transmit Clock Input  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 1  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 2  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 3  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 4  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 5  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 6  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 7  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 8  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 9  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 10  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 11  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 12  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 13  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 14  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 15  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 16  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 17  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 18  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 19  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 20  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 21  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 22  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 23  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 24  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 25  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 26  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 27  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Port 28  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Insert Port A  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Clock for Insert Port B  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 1  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 2  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 3  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 4  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 5  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 6  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 7  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 8  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 9  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 10  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 11  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 12  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 13  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 14  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 15  
U7  
W7  
Y8  
Y9  
Y11  
W12  
V13  
V14  
V15  
W17  
W18  
Y20  
U18  
T18  
P17  
P19  
N20  
M20  
K20  
J19  
H18  
L2  
M3  
N3  
P3  
T2  
V1  
W1  
W4  
Y4  
V6  
V7  
W8  
W9  
Y10  
Y12  
W13  
Y15  
17 of 133  
DS3112  
PIN  
U14  
V16  
V17  
W19  
U19  
U20  
R18  
P18  
N19  
M19  
L20  
J20  
NAME  
TYPE  
FUNCTION  
LTDAT16  
LTDAT17  
LTDAT18  
LTDAT19  
LTDAT20  
LTDAT21  
LTDAT22  
LTDAT23  
LTDAT24  
LTDAT25  
LTDAT26  
LTDAT27  
LTDAT28  
LTDATA  
LTDATB  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 16  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 17  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 18  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 19  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 20  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 21  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 22  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 23  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 24  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 25  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 26  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 27  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Port 28  
H19  
L1  
M2  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Insert Port A  
Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Data for Insert Port B  
A6, A12, A15–  
A20, B1, B7,  
B11, B12, B15–  
B20, C13, C15–  
C20, D12, D14,  
D16, D18, D19,  
D20, E17–E20,  
F18, F19, F20,  
G17, G18, T1,  
W2, Y1  
N.C.  
No Connection. Do not connect any signal to this pin.  
C5  
B4  
C3  
RST  
T3E3MS  
TEST  
I
I
I
Active-Low Reset  
T3/E3 Mode Select, 0 = T3, 1 = E3  
Active-Low Factory Test Input  
D6, D10, D11,  
D15, F4, F17,  
K4, K17, L4,  
L17, R4, R17,  
U6, U10, U11,  
U15  
A1, D4, D8,  
D9, D13, D17,  
H4, H17, J17,  
M4, N4, N17,  
U4, U8, U12,  
U13, U17  
VDD  
3.3V (±5%) Positive Supply  
Ground Reference  
VSS  
18 of 133  
DS3112  
2.2 CPU Bus Signal Description  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: CPU Bus Mode Select  
Signal Type: Input  
CMS  
This signal should be tied low when the device is to be operated as a 16-bit bus. This signal should be tied  
high when the device is to be operated as an 8-bit bus.  
0 = CPU Bus is in the 16-Bit Mode  
1 = CPU Bus is in the 8-Bit Mode  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: CPU Bus Intel/Motorola Bus Select  
Signal Type: Input  
CIM  
The signal determines whether the CPU Bus will operate in the Intel Mode (CIM = 0) or the Motorola  
Mode (CIM = 1). The signal names in parentheses are operational when the device is in the Motorola  
Mode.  
0 = CPU Bus is in the Intel Mode  
1 = CPU Bus is in the Motorola Mode  
Signal Name:  
CD0 to CD15  
Signal Description: CPU Bus Data Bus  
Signal Type:  
Input/Output (Tri-State Capable)  
The external host will configure the device and obtain real-time status information about the device via  
these signals. When reading data from the CPU Bus, these signals will be outputs. When writing data to  
the CPU Bus, these signals will become inputs. When the CPU bus is operated in the 8-bit mode  
(CMS = 1), CD8 to CD15 are inactive and should be tied low.  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: CPU Bus Address Bus  
Signal Type: Input  
CA0 to CA7  
These input signals determine which internal device configuration register that the external host wishes to  
access. When the CPU bus is operated in the 16-bit mode (CMS = 0), CA0 is inactive and should be tied  
low. When the CPU bus is operated in the 8-bit mode (CMS = 1), CA0 is the least significant address bit.  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: CPU Bus Write Enable (CPU Bus Read/Write Select)  
Signal Type: Input  
CWR (CR/W)  
In Intel Mode (CIM = 0), this signal will determine when data is to be written to the device. In Motorola  
Mode (CIM = 1), this signal will be used to determine whether a read or write is to occur.  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: CPU Bus Read Enable (CPU Bus Data Strobe)  
Signal Type: Input  
CRD (CDS)  
In Intel Mode (CIM = 0) this signal will determine when data is to be read from the device. In Motorola  
Mode (CIM = 1), a rising edge will be used to write data into the device.  
19 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: CPU Bus Interrupt  
Signal Type: Output (Open Drain)  
CINT  
This signal is an open-drain output that will be forced low if one or more unmasked interrupt sources  
within the device is active. The signal will remain low until either the interrupt is serviced or masked.  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: CPU Bus Chip Select  
Signal Type: Input  
CCS  
This active low signal must be asserted for the device to accept a read or write command from an external  
host.  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: CPU Bus Address Latch Enable  
Signal Type: Input  
CALE  
This input signal controls a latch that exists on the CA0 to CA7 inputs. When CALE is high, the latch is  
transparent. The falling edge of CALE causes the latch to sample and hold the CA0 to CA7 inputs. In  
nonmultiplexed bus applications, CALE should be tied high. In multiplexed bus applications, CA[7:0]  
should be tied to CD[7:0] and the falling edge of CALE will latch the address.  
20 of 133  
DS3112  
2.3 T3/E3 Receive Framer Signal Description  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: T3/E3 Receive Framer Start Of Frame Sync Signal  
Signal Type: Output  
FRSOF  
This signal pulses for one FRCLK period to indicate the T3 or E3 frame boundary (Figure 2-1). This  
signal can be configured via the FRSOFI control bit in Master Control Register 3 (Section 4.2) to be  
either active high (normal mode) or active low (inverted mode).  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: T3/E3 Receive Framer Clock  
Signal Type: Output  
FRCLK  
This signal outputs the clock that is used to pass data through the receive T3/E3 framer. It can be sourced  
from either the HRCLK or FTCLK inputs (Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2). This signal is used to clock the  
receive data out of the device at the FRD output. Data can be either updated on a rising edge (normal  
mode) or a falling edge (inverted mode). This option is controlled via the FRCLKI control bit in Master  
Control Register 3 (Section 4.3).  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: T3/E3 Receive Framer Serial Data  
Signal Type: Output  
FRD  
This signal outputs data from the receive T3/E3 framer. This signal is updated either on the rising edge of  
FRCLK (normal mode) or the falling edge of FRCLK (inverted mode). This option is controlled via the  
FRCLKI control bit in Master Control Register 3 (Section 4.3). Also, this signal can be internally inverted  
if enabled via the FRDI control bit in Master Control Register 3 (Section 4.3).  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: T3/E3 Receive Framer Serial Data Enable or Gapped Clock Output  
Signal Type: Output  
FRDEN  
Via the DENMS control bit in Master Control Register 1, this signal can be configured to either output a  
data enable or a gapped clock. In the data enable mode, this signal will go active when payload data is  
available at the FRD output and it will go inactive when overhead data is being output at the FRD output.  
In the gapped clock mode, this signal will transition for each bit of payload data and will be suppressed  
for each bit of overhead data. In the T3 Mode, overhead data is defined as the M Bits, F Bits, C Bits, X  
Bits, and P Bits. In the E3 Mode, overhead data is defined as the FAS word, RAI Bit and Sn Bit (i.e., bits  
1 to 12). See Figure 2-1 for an example. This signal can be internally inverted if enabled via the FRDENI  
control bit in Master Control Register 3 (Section 4.3).  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: T3/E3 Receive Framer Manual Error Counter Update Strobe  
Signal Type: Input  
FRMECU  
Via the AECU control bit in Master Control Register 1 (Section 4.3), the DS3112 can be configured to  
use this asynchronous input to initiate an updating of the internal error counters. A zero to one transition  
on this input causes the device to begin loading the internal error counters with the latest error counts.  
This signal must be returned low before a subsequent updating of the error counters can occur. The host  
must wait at least 100ns before reading the error counters to allow the device time to update the error  
counters. This signal is logically ORed with the MECU control bit in Master Control Register 1. If this  
signal is not used, then it should be tied low.  
21 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: T3/E3 Receive Framer Loss Of Signal  
Signal Type: Output  
FRLOS  
This signal will be forced high when the receive T3/E3 framer is in a Loss Of Signal (LOS) state. It will  
remain high as long as the LOS state persists and will return low when the framer exits the LOS state. See  
Section 5.3 for details on the set and clear criteria for this signal. LOS status is also available via a  
software bit in the T3/E3 Status Register (Section 5.3).  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: T3/E3 Receive Framer Loss Of Frame  
Signal Type: Output  
FRLOF  
This signal will be forced high when the receive T3/E3 framer is in a Loss Of Frame (LOF) state. It will  
remain high as long as the LOF state persists and will return low when the framer synchronizes. See  
Section 5.3 for details on the set and clear criteria for this signal. LOF status is also available via a  
software bit in the T3/E3 Status Register (Section 5.3).  
Figure 2-1. T3/E3 Receive Framer Timing  
FRCLK  
Normal Mode  
FRCLK  
Inverted Mode  
Last Bit of  
the Frame  
T3: X1  
E3: Bit 1 of FAS  
FRD  
(see note)  
FRDEN  
Data Enable Mode for T3  
(see note)  
FRDEN  
Data Enable Mode for E3  
(see note)  
FRDEN  
Gapped Clock Mode for T3  
(see note)  
FRDEN  
Gapped Clock Mode for E3  
(see note)  
FRSOF  
(see note)  
NOTE: FRD, FRDEN, AND FRSOF CAN BE INVERTED VIA MASTER CONTROL REGISTER 3.  
22 of 133  
 
DS3112  
2.4 T3/E3 Transmit Formatter Signal Description  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: T3/E3 Transmit Formatter Start Of Frame Sync Signal  
Signal Type: Output/Input  
FTSOF  
This signal can be configured via the FTSOFC control bit in Master Control Register 1 to be either an  
output or an input. When this signal is an output, it pulses for one FTCLK period to indicate a T3 or E3  
frame boundary (Figure 2-2). When this signal is an input, it is sampled to set the transmit T3 or E3 frame  
boundary (Figure 2-2). This signal can be configured via the FTSOFI control bit in Master Control  
Register 3 (Section 4.2) to be either active high (normal mode) or active low (inverted mode).  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: T3/E3 Transmit Formatter Clock  
Signal Type: Input  
FTCLK  
An accurate T3 (44.736MHz ±20ppm) or E3 (34.368MHz ±20ppm) clock should be applied at this signal.  
This signal is used to clock data into the transmit T3/E3 formatter. Transmit data can be clocked into the  
device either on a rising edge (normal mode) or a falling edge (inverted mode). This option is controlled  
via the FTCLKI control bit in Master Control Register 3 (Section 4.2).  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: T3/E3 Transmit Formatter Serial Data  
Signal Type: Input  
FTD  
This signal inputs data into the transmit T3/E3 formatter. This signal can be sampled either on the rising  
edge of FTCLK (normal mode) or the falling edge of FTCLK (inverted mode). This option is controlled  
via the FTCLKI control bit in Master Control Register 3 (Section 4.2). Also, the data input to this signal  
can be internally inverted if enabled via the FTDI control bit in Master Control Register 3 (Section 4.2).  
When T3 C-Bit Parity Mode is disabled, C Bits are sampled at this input. This signal is ignored when the  
M13/E13 multiplexer is enabled. (See the UNCHEN control bit in Master Control Register 1.) If not  
used, this signal should be tied low.  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: T3/E3 Transmit Formatter Serial Data Enable or Gapped Clock Output  
Signal Type: Output  
FTDEN  
Via the DENMS control bit in Master Control Register 1, this signal can be configured to either output a  
data enable or a gapped clock. In the data enable mode, this signal will go active when payload data  
should be made available at the FTD input. In the gapped clock mode, this signal will act as a demand  
clock for the FTD input and it will transition for each bit of payload data needed at the FTD input and it  
will be suppressed when the transmit formatter inserts overhead data and hence no data is needed at the  
FTD input. In the T3 Mode, overhead data is defined as the M Bits, F Bits, C Bits, X Bits, and P Bits. In  
the E3 Mode, overhead data is defined as the FAS word, RAI Bit and Sn Bit (i.e., bits 1 to 12). See  
Figure 2-2 for an example. This signal can be internally inverted if enabled via the FTDENI control bit in  
Master Control Register 3 (Section 4.2). This signal operates in the same manner even when the device is  
configured in the Transmit Pass Through mode (see the TPT control bit in the T3/E3 Control Register).  
23 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: T3/E3 Transmit Formatter Manual Error Insert Strobe  
Signal Type: Input  
FTMEI  
Via the EIC control bit in the T3/E3 Error Insert Control Register (Section 5.2), the DS3112 can be  
configured to use this asynchronous input to cause errors to be inserted into the transmitted data stream.  
A zero to one transition on this input causes the device to begin the process of causing errors to be  
inserted. This signal must be returned low before any subsequent errors can be generated. If this signal is  
not used, then it should be tied low.  
Figure 2-2. T3/E3 Transmit Formatter Timing  
FTCLK  
Normal Mode  
FTCLK  
Inverted Mode  
Last Bit of  
the Frame  
T3: X1  
E3: Bit 1 of FAS  
FTD  
(see note)  
FTDEN  
Data Enable Mode for T3  
(see note)  
FTDEN  
Data Enable Mode for  
(see note)  
FTDEN  
Gapped Clock Mode for T3  
(see note)  
FTDEN  
Gapped Clock Mode for E3  
(see note)  
FTSOF  
Output Mode  
(see note)  
FTSOF  
Input Mode  
(see note)  
NOTE: FTD, FTDEN, AND FTSOF CAN BE INVERTED VIA MASTER CONTROL REGISTER 3.  
24 of 133  
 
DS3112  
2.5 Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Port Signal Description  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Serial Data Outputs  
Signal Type: Output  
LRDAT1 to LRDAT28  
These output signals present the demultiplexed serial data for the 28 T1 data streams or the 16/21 E1 data  
streams. Data can be clocked out of the device either on rising edges (normal clock mode) or falling  
edges (inverted clock mode) of the associated LRCLK. This option is controlled via the LRCLKI control  
bit in Master Control Register 2 (Section 4.2). Also, the data can be internally inverted before being  
output if enabled via the LRDATI control bit in Master Control Register 2 (Section 4.2). When the device  
is in the E3 Mode, LRDAT17 to LRDAT28 are meaningless and should be ignored. When the device is  
in the G.747 Mode, LRDAT4, LRDAT8, LRDAT12, LRDAT16, LRDAT20, LRDAT24, and LRDAT28  
are meaningless and should be ignored. When the M13/E13 multiplexer is disabled, then these outputs are  
meaningless and should be ignored.  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Serial Clock Outputs  
Signal Type: Output  
LRCLK1 to LRCLK28  
These output signals present the demultiplexed serial clocks for the 28 T1 data streams or the 16/21 E1  
data streams. The T1 or E1 serial data streams at the associated LRDAT signals can be clocked out of the  
device either on rising edges (normal clock mode) or falling edges (inverted clock mode) of LRCLK.  
This option is controlled via the LRCLKI control bit in Master Control Register 2 (Section 4.2). When the  
device is in the E3 Mode, LRCLK17 to LRCLK28 are meaningless and should be ignored. When the  
device is in the G.747 Mode, LRCLK4, LRCLK8, LRCLK12, LRCLK16, LRCLK20, LRCLK24, and  
LRCLK28 are meaningless and should be ignored. When the M13/E13 multiplexer is disabled, then these  
outputs are meaningless and should be ignored.  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Drop Port Serial Data Outputs  
Signal Type: Output  
LRDATA/LRDATB  
These two output signals present the demultiplexed serial data from one of the 28 T1 data streams or from  
one of the 16/21 E1 data streams (Section 7.4). Data can be clocked out of the device either on rising  
edges (normal clock mode) or falling edges (inverted clock mode) of the associated LRCLK. This option  
is controlled via the LRCLKI control bit in Master Control Register 2 (Section 4.2). Also, the data can be  
internally inverted before being output if enabled via the LRDATI control bit in Master Control Register  
2 (Section 4.2). When the M13/E13 multiplexer is disabled, then these outputs are meaningless and  
should be ignored.  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Drop Port Serial Clock Outputs  
Signal Type: Output  
LRCLKA/LRCLKB  
These output signals present the demultiplexed serial clocks from one of the 28 T1 data streams or from  
one of the 16/21 E1 data streams (Section 7.4). The T1 or E1 serial data streams at the associated LRDAT  
signals can be clocked out of the device either on rising edges (normal clock mode) or falling edges  
(inverted clock mode) of LRCLK. This option is controlled via the LRCLKI control bit in Master Control  
Register 2 (Section 4.2). When the M13/E13 multiplexer is disabled, then these outputs are meaningless  
and should be ignored.  
25 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Receive Common Clock Input  
Signal Type: Input  
LRCCLK  
If enabled via the LRCCEN control bit in Master Control Register 1 (Section 4.2), all 28 LRCLK or  
16/21 LRCLK can be slaved to this common clock input. In T3 mode, LRCCLK would be a 1.544MHz  
clock and in E3 mode, LRCCLK would be 2.048MHz. Use of this configuration is only possible in  
applications where it can be guaranteed that all of the multiplexed T1 or E1 signals at the far end are  
based on a common clock. If this signal is not used, then it should be tied low. This signal can be  
internally inverted. This option is controlled via the LRCLKI control bit in Master Control Register 2  
(Section 4.2).  
2.6 Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Port Signal Description  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Serial Data Inputs  
Signal Type: Input  
LTDAT1 to LTDAT28  
These input signals sample the serial data from the 28 T1 data streams or the 16/21 E1 data streams that  
will be multiplexed into a single T3 or E3 data stream. Data can be clocked into the device either on  
falling edges (normal clock mode) or rising edges (inverted clock mode) of the associated LTCLK. This  
option is controlled via the LTCLKI control bit in Master Control Register 2 (Section 4.2). Also, the data  
can be internally inverted before being multiplexed if enabled via the LTDATI control bit in Master  
Control Register 2 (Section 4.2). When the device is in the E3 Mode, LTDAT17 to LTDAT28 are  
ignored and should be tied low. When the device is in the G.747 Mode, LTDAT4, LTDAT8, LTDAT12,  
LTDAT16, LTDAT20, LTDAT24, and LTDAT28 are ignored and should be tied low. When the  
M13/E13 multiplexer is disabled, then these inputs are ignored and should be tied low.  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Serial Clock Inputs  
Signal Type: Input  
LTCLK1 to LTCLK28  
These input signals clock data in from the 28 T1 data streams or from the 16/21 E1 data streams. The T1  
or E1 serial data streams at the associated LTDAT signals can be clocked into the device either on falling  
edges (normal clock mode) or rising edges (inverted clock mode) of LTCLK. This option is controlled via  
the LTCLKI control bit in Master Control Register 2 (Section 4.2). When the device is in the E3 Mode,  
LTCLK17 to LTCLK28 are meaningless and should be tied low. When the device is in the G.747 Mode,  
LTCLK4, LTCLK8, LTCLK12, LTCLK16, LTCLK20, LTCLK24, and LTCLK28 are meaningless and  
should be tied low. When the M13/E13 multiplexer is disabled, then these inputs are ignored and should  
be tied low.  
26 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Insert Port Serial Data Inputs  
Signal Type: Input  
LTDATA/LTDATB  
These two input signals allow data to be inserted in place of any of the 28 T1 data streams or into any of  
the 16/21 E1 data streams (Section 7.4). Data can be clocked into the device either on falling edges  
(normal clock mode) or rising edges (inverted clock mode) of the associated LTCLK. This option is  
controlled via the LTCLKI control bit in Master Control Register 2 (Section 4.2). Also, the data can be  
internally inverted before being multiplexed if enabled via the LTDATI control bit in Master Control  
Register 2 (Section 4.2). When the M13/E13 multiplexer is disabled, then these inputs are ignored and  
should be tied low.  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Insert Port Serial Clock Inputs  
Signal Type: Input  
LTCLKA/LTCLKB  
These two input signals are used to clock data into the device that will be inserted into one of the 28 T1  
data streams or into one of the 16/21 E1 data streams (Section 7.4). The T1 or E1 serial data streams at  
the associated LTDAT signals can be clocked into the device either on falling edges (normal clock mode)  
or rising edges (inverted clock mode) of LTCLKA/LTCLKB. This option is controlled via the LTCLKI  
control bit in Master Control Register 2 (Section 4.2). When the M13/E13 multiplexer is disabled, then  
these inputs are ignored and should be tied low.  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: Low-Speed (T1 or E1) Transmit Common Clock Input  
Signal Type: Input  
LTCCLK  
If enabled via the LTCCEN in Master Control Register 1 (Section 4.2), all 28 LTCLK or 16 LTCLK  
signals are disabled and all the data at the 28 LTDAT or 16 LTDAT inputs (as well as the LTDATA and  
LTDATB inputs) will be clocked into the device using the LTCCLK signal. In T3 mode, LTCCLK would  
be a 1.544MHz clock and in E3 mode, LTCCLK would be 2.048MHz. If not used, this signal should be  
tied low. If this signal is used, then all of the LTCLK signals should be tied low. This signal can be  
internally inverted. This option is controlled via the LTCLKI control bit in Master Control Register 2  
(Section 4.2).  
27 of 133  
DS3112  
2.7 High-Speed (T3 or E3) Receive Port Signal Description  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: High-Speed (T3 or E3) Receive Serial Data Inputs  
Signal Type: Input  
HRPOS/HRNEG  
These input signals sample the serial data from the incoming T3 data streams or E3 data streams. Data  
can be clocked into the device either on rising edges (normal clock mode) or falling edges (inverted clock  
mode) of the associated HRCLK. This option is controlled via the HRCLKI control bit in Master Control  
Register 2 (Section 4.2).  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: High-Speed (T3 or E3) Receive Serial Clock Input  
Signal Type: Input  
HRCLK  
This signal is used to clock data in from the incoming T3 or E3 data streams. The T3 or E3 serial data  
streams at the HRPOS and HRNEG signals can be clocked into the device either on rising edges (normal  
clock mode) or falling edges (inverted clock mode) of HRCLK. This option is controlled via the HRCLKI  
control bit in Master Control Register 2 (Section 4.2).  
Note: The HRCLK must be present for the host to be able to obtain status information (except the LOTC  
and LORC status bits, see Section 4.3) from the device.  
2.8 High-Speed (T3 or E3) Transmit Port Signal Description  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: High-Speed (T3 or E3) Transmit Serial Data Outputs  
Signal Type: Output  
HTPOS/HTNEG  
These output signals present the outgoing T3 data streams or E3 data streams. Data can be clocked out of  
the device either on rising edges (normal clock mode) or falling edges (inverted clock mode) of HTCLK.  
This option is controlled via the HTCLKI control bit in Master Control Register 2 (Section 4.2). Also,  
these outputs can be forced high or low via the HTDATH and HTDATL control bits respectively in  
Master Control Register 2 (Section 4.2).  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: High-Speed (T3 or E3) Transmit Serial Clock Output  
Signal Type: Output  
HTCLK  
This output signal is used to clock T3 or E3 data out of the device. The T3 or E3 serial data streams at the  
HTPOS and HTNEG signals can be clocked out of the device either on rising edges (normal clock mode)  
or falling edges (inverted clock mode) of HTCLK. This option is controlled via the HTCLKI control bit  
in Master Control Register 2 (Section 4.2).  
28 of 133  
 
DS3112  
2.9 JTAG Signal Description  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: JTAG IEEE 1149.1 Test Serial Clock  
Signal Type: Input  
JTCLK  
This signal is used to shift data into JTDI on the rising edge and out of JTDO on the falling edge. If not  
used, this signal should be pulled high.  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: JTAG IEEE 1149.1 Test Serial Data Input  
Signal Type: Input (with internal 10kpullup)  
JTDI  
Test instructions and data are clocked into this signal on the rising edge of JTCLK. If not used, this signal  
should be pulled high. This signal has an internal pullup.  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: JTAG IEEE 1149.1 Test Serial Data Output  
Signal Type: Output  
JTDO  
Test instructions are clocked out of this signal on the falling edge of JTCLK. If not used, this signal  
should be left open circuited.  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: JTAG IEEE 1149.1 Test Reset  
Signal Type: Input (with internal 10kpullup)  
JTRST  
This signal is used to asynchronously reset the test access port controller. At power-up, JTRST must be  
set low and then high. This action will set the device into the boundary scan bypass mode allowing  
normal device operation. If boundary scan is not used, this signal should be held low. This signal has an  
internal pullup.  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: JTAG IEEE 1149.1 Test Mode Select  
Signal Type: Input (with internal 10kpullup)  
JTMS  
This signal is sampled on the rising edge of JTCLK and is used to place the test port into the various  
defined IEEE 1149.1 states. If not used, this signal should be pulled high. This signal has an internal  
pullup.  
2.10 Supply, Test, Reset, and Mode Signal Description  
Signal Name:  
RST*  
Signal Description: Global Hardware Reset  
Signal Type:  
Input (with internal 10kpullup)  
This active low asynchronous signal causes the device to be reset. When this signal is forced low, it  
causes all of the internal registers to be forced to 00h and the high-speed T3/E3 ports as well as the low-  
speed T1/E1 ports to source an unframed all ones data pattern. The device will be held in a reset state as  
long as this signal is low. This signal should be activated after the hardware configuration signals (LIEN  
and T3E3MS) and the clocks (FTCLK, LTCLK, HRCLK, and LITCLK) are stable and must be returned  
high before the device can be configured for operation.  
29 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: T3/E3 Mode Select Input  
Signal Type: Input  
T3E3MS  
This signal determines whether the DS3112 will operate in either the T3 mode or the E3 mode. It acts as a  
global control bit for the entire DS3112. This signal should be set into the proper state before a hardware  
reset is issued via the RST signal. This input is coupled with the G.747E input to create a special test  
mode whereby all the outputs are tri-stated (Table 2-3).  
0 = T3 Mode  
1 = E3 Mode  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: G.747 Mode Enable Input  
Signal Type: Input  
G.747E  
This signal determines whether the DS3112 will operate in either the T3 mode or the G.747 mode. It acts  
as a global control bit for the entire DS3112. This signal should be set into the proper state before a  
hardware reset is issued via the RST signal. This input is coupled with the T3E3MS input to create a  
special test mode whereby all the outputs are tri-stated (Table 2-3).  
0 = T3 Mode  
1 = G.747 Mode  
Table 2-3. Mode Select Decode  
T3E3MS  
G.747E  
MODE SELECTED  
0
0
1
0
1
0
T3 or M13 Operation  
G.747 Operation  
E3 or E13 Operation  
Special Test Mode that tri-states all outputs. JTRST must be driven  
low for tri-state operation without power-up. Refer to note for  
JTRST signal.  
1
1
Signal Name:  
TEST  
Signal Description: Factory Test Input  
Signal Type:  
Input (with internal 10kpullup)  
This input should be left open circuited by the user.  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: Digital Ground Reference  
Signal Type: N/A  
All VSS signals should be tied together.  
VSS  
Signal Name:  
Signal Description: Digital Positive Supply  
Signal Type: N/A  
3.3V (±5%). All VDD signals should be tied together.  
VDD  
30 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
3 MEMORY MAP  
Table 3-1. Memory Map  
ADDRESS ACRONYM R/W  
REGISTER NAME  
SECTION  
00  
02  
04  
06  
08  
0A  
0C  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
2A  
30  
32  
34  
36  
40  
42  
44  
46  
50  
52  
54  
56  
58  
5A  
5C  
5E  
60  
62  
6E  
70  
72  
74  
76  
78  
7A  
7C  
7E  
80  
MRID  
MC1  
MC2  
MC3  
MSR  
R/W Master Reset and ID Register  
4.1  
4.2  
4.2  
4.2  
4.3  
4.3  
4.4  
5.2  
5.3  
5.3  
5.3  
5.3  
5.4  
5.4  
5.4  
5.4  
5.4  
5.4  
6.2  
6.2  
6.4  
6.4  
6.4  
6.4  
6.4  
6.4  
7.1  
7.1  
7.2  
7.2  
7.3  
7.3  
7.6  
7.6  
7.4  
7.4  
8.1  
8.1  
8.1  
8.1  
8.1  
8.1  
8.1  
8.1  
8.1  
9.1  
R/W Master Configuration Register 1  
R/W Master Configuration Register 2  
R/W Master Configuration Register 3  
R
Master Status Register  
IMSR  
TEST  
R/W Interrupt Mask Register for MSR  
R/W Test Register  
R/W T3/E3 Control Register  
T3E3CR  
T3E3SR  
IT3E3SR  
T3E3INFO  
T3E3EIC  
BPVCR  
EXZCR  
FECR  
PCR  
CPCR  
R
T3/E3 Status Register  
R/W Interrupt Mask for T3E3SR  
T3/E3 Information Register  
R/W T3/E3 Error Insert Control Register  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T3/E3 Bipolar Violation (BPV) Count Register  
T3/E3 Excessive Zero (EXZ) Count Register  
T3/E3 Frame Error Count Register  
T3 Parity Bit Error Count Register  
T3 C-Bit Parity Error Count Register  
FEBECR  
T2E2CR1  
T2E2CR2  
T2E2SR1  
T2E2SR2  
T1E1RAIS1  
T1E1RAIS2  
T1E1TAIS1  
T1E1TAIS2  
T1E1LLB1  
T1E1LLB2  
T1E1DLB1  
T1E1DLB2  
T1LBCR1  
T1LBCR2  
T1LBSR1  
T1LBSR2  
T1E1SDP  
T1E1SIP  
BERTMC  
BERTC0  
BERTC1  
BERTRP0  
BERTRP1  
BERTBC0  
BERTBC1  
BERTEC0  
BERTEC1  
HCR  
T3 Far End Block Error or E3 RAI Count Register  
R/W T2/E2 Control Register 1  
R/W T2/E2 Control Register 2  
R/W T2/E2 Status Register 1  
R/W T2/E2 Status Register 2  
R/W T1/E1 Receive Path AIS Generation Control Register 1  
R/W T1/E1 Receive Path AIS Generation Control Register 2  
R/W T1/E1 Transmit Path AIS Generation Control Register 1  
R/W T1/E1 Transmit Path AIS Generation Control Register 2  
R/W T1/E1 Line Loopback Control Register 1  
R/W T1/E1 Line Loopback Control Register 2  
R/W T1/E1 Diagnostic Loopback Control Register 1  
R/W T1/E1 Diagnostic Loopback Control Register 2  
R/W T1 Line Loopback Command Register 1  
R/W T1 Line Loopback Command Register 2  
R
R
T1 Line Loopback Status Register 1  
T1 Line Loopback Status Register 2  
R/W T1/E1 Select Register for Receive Drop Ports A and B  
R/W T1/E1 Select Register for Transmit Drop Ports A and B  
R/W BERT Mux Control Register  
R/W BERT Control 0  
R/W BERT Control 1  
R/W BERT Repetitive Pattern Set 0 (lower word)  
R/W BERT Repetitive Pattern Set 1 (upper word)  
R
R
R
R
BERT Bit Counter 0 (lower word)  
BERT Bit Counter 1 (upper word)  
BERT Error Counter 0 (lower word)  
BERT Error Counter 1 (upper word)  
R/W HDLC Control Register  
31 of 133  
 
DS3112  
SECTION  
ADDRESS ACRONYM R/W  
REGISTER NAME  
Receive HDLC FIFO Register  
Transmit HDLC FIFO Register  
HDLC Status Register  
82  
84  
RHDLC  
THDLC  
HSR  
R
W
R
9.2  
9.2  
9.3  
86  
88  
90  
92  
IHSR  
FCR  
FSR  
R/W Interrupt Mask Register for HSR  
R/W FEAC Control Register  
9.3  
10.1  
10.2  
R
FEAC Status Register  
38, 48, 64,  
66, 68, 94,  
96, 98, 0E,  
1A, 1C, 1E,  
2C, 2E, 3A,  
3C, 3E, 4A,  
4C, 4E, 6A,  
6C, 8A, 8C,  
8E, 9A, 9C,  
9E  
Not Assigned  
*
*Addresses A0 to FF are not assigned.  
32 of 133  
DS3112  
4 MASTER DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND STATUS/INTERRUPT  
4.1 Master Reset and ID Register Description  
The master reset and ID (MRID) register can be used to globally reset the device. When the RST bit is set  
to one, all of the internal registers will be placed into their default state, which is 0000h. A reset can also  
be invoked by the RST hardware signal.  
The upper byte of the MRID register is read-only and it can be read by the host to determine the chip  
revision. Contact the factory for specifics on the meaning of the value read from the ID0 to ID7 bits.  
Register Name:  
MRID  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
Master Reset and ID Register  
00h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
6
5
4
3
T3E3RSY  
0
2
T2E2RSY  
0
1
RFIFOR  
0
0
RST  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
ID7  
X
14  
ID6  
X
13  
ID5  
X
12  
ID4  
X
11  
ID3  
X
10  
ID2  
X
9
ID1  
X
8
ID0  
X
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bit 0: Master Software Reset (RST). When this bit is set to a one by the host, it will force all of the internal  
registers to their default state, which is 0000h and forces the T3/E3 and T1/E1 outputs to send an all ones pattern.  
This bit must be set high for a minimum of 100ns. This software bit is logically ORed with the hardware signal  
RST.  
0 = normal operation  
1 = force all internal registers to their default value of 0000h  
Bit 1: Low-Speed (T1/E1) Receive FIFO Reset (RFIFOR). A zero to one transition on this bit will cause the  
receive T1/E1 demux FIFOs to be reset, which will cause them to be flushed. See the DS3112 Block Diagrams in  
Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 for details on the placement of the FIFOs within the chip. This bit must be cleared and  
set again for a subsequent reset to occur.  
Bit 2: T2/E2/G.747 Force Receive Framer Resynchronization (T2E2RSY). A zero to one transition on this bit  
will cause all seven of the T2 receive framers or all four of the E2 receive framers or all seven of the G.747 framers  
to resynchronize. This bit must be cleared and set again for a subsequent resynchronization to occur.  
Bit 3: T3/E3 Force Receive Framer Resynchronization (T3E3RSY). A zero to one transition on this bit will  
cause the T3 receive framer or the E3 receive framer to resynchronize. This bit must be cleared and set again for a  
subsequent resynchronization to occur.  
Bits 8 to 15: Chip Revision ID Bit 0 to 7 (ID0 to ID7). Read-only. Contact the factory for details on the meaning  
of the ID bits.  
33 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
4.2 Master Configuration Registers Description  
Register Name:  
MC1  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
Master Configuration Register 1  
02h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
FTSOFC  
0
6
LOTCMC  
0
5
UNI  
0
4
MECU  
0
3
AECU  
0
2
CBEN  
0
1
UNCHEN  
0
0
ZCSD  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
LLTM  
0
10  
DENMS  
0
9
LRCCEN  
0
8
LTCCEN  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bit 0: Zero Code Suppression Disable (ZCSD).  
0 = enable the B3ZS and HDB3 encoders/decoders  
1 = disable the B3ZS and HDB3 encoders/decoders  
Bit 1: T3/E3 Unchannelized Mode Enable (UNCHEN). When this bit is set low, the M13/E13/G.747 multiplexer  
is enabled and data at the FTD input is ignored. When this bit is set high, the M13/E13/G.747 multiplexer is  
disabled and the LTDAT inputs are ignored. The table below displays which bits are not sampled at the FTD input  
when UNCHEN = 1.  
0 = enable the M13/E13/G.747 multiplexers and disable the FTD Input  
1 = disable the M13/E13/G.747 multiplexers and enable the FTD Input  
BITS POSITIONS NOT  
DS3112 MODE  
SAMPLED AT FTD  
T3 M23 (C-Bit Parity  
F/P/M/C/X  
Disabled)  
T3 C-Bit Parity  
E3  
F/P/M/X  
FAS/Sn/RAI  
Bit 2: T3 C-Bit Parity Mode Enable (CBEN). This bit is only active when the device is T3 mode. When this bit  
is set low, C-Bit Parity is defeated and the C Bits are sourced from the M23 Multiplexer Block (Figure 1-1). This  
bit should not be set low in the T3 unchannelized mode (UNCHEN = 1). When this bit is set high, C-Bit Parity  
mode is enabled and the C bits are sourced from the T3 framer block (Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-3).  
0 = disable C-Bit Parity mode (also known as the M23 Mode)  
1 = enable C-Bit Parity mode  
Bit 3: Automatic One-Second Error Counters Update Defeat (AECU). When this bit is set low, the device will  
automatically update the T3/E3 performance error counters on an internally created one-second boundary. The host  
will be notified of the update via the setting of the OST status bit in the Master Status Register. In this mode, the  
host has a full one second period to retrieve the error information before if will be overwritten with the next update.  
When this bit is set high, the device will defeat the automatic one-second update and enable a manual update mode.  
In the manual update mode, the device relies on either the Framer Manual Error Counter Update (FRMECU)  
hardware input signal or the MECU control bit to update the error counters. The FRMECU hardware input signal  
and MECU control bit are logically ORed and hence a zero to one transition on either will initiate an error counter  
update to occur. After either the FRMECU signal or MECU bit has toggled, the host must wait at least 100ns  
before reading the error counters to allow the device time to complete the update.  
0 = enable the automatic update mode and disable the manual update mode  
1 = disable the automatic update mode and enable the manual update mode  
34 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
Bit 4: Manual Error Counter Update (MECU). A zero to one transition on this bit will cause the device to  
update the performance error counters. This bit is ignored if the AECU control bit is set low. This bit must be  
cleared and set again for a subsequent update. This bit is logically ORed with the external FRMECU hardware  
input signal. After this bit has toggled, the host must wait at least 100ns before reading the error counters to allow  
the device time to complete the update.  
Bit 5: High-Speed (T3/E3) Port Unipolar Enable (UNI). When this bit is set low, the device will output a bipolar  
coded signal at HTPOS and HTNEG and expect a bipolar coded signal at HRPOS and HRNEG. When this bit is  
set high, the device will output a NRZ coded signal at HTPOS and expect a NRZ coded signal at HRPOS. In the  
unipolar mode, the device will force the HTNEG output low and the HRNEG input is ignored and should be tied  
low. In the unipolar mode, the B3ZS and HDB3 coder/decoders should be disabled by setting the ZCSD bit to one  
(ZCSD = 1).  
0 = bipolar mode  
1 = unipolar mode  
Bit 6: Loss Of Transmit Clock Mux Control (LOTCMC). The DS3112 can detect if the FTCLK fails to  
transition. If this bit is set low, the device will take no action (other than setting the LOTC status bit) when the  
FTCLK fails to transition. When this bit is set high, the device will automatically switch to the input receive clock  
(HRCLK) when the FTCLK fails and transmit AIS.  
0 = do not switch to the HRCLK signal if FTCLK fails to transition  
1 = automatically switch to the HRCLK signal if the FTCLK fails to transition and send AIS  
Bit 7: T3/E3 Transmit Frame Sync I/O Control (FTSOFC). When this bit is set low, the FTSOF signal will be  
an output and will pulse for one FTCLK cycle at the beginning of each frame. When this bit is high, the FTSOF  
signal is an input and the device uses it to determine the frame boundaries.  
0 = FTSOF is an output  
1 = FTSOF is an input  
Bit 8: Low-Speed (T1/E1) Transmit Port Common Clock Enable (LTCCEN). When this bit is set high, the  
LTCLK1 to LTCLK28 and LTCLKA and LTCLKB inputs are ignored and a common clock sourced via the  
LTCCLK input is used in their place.  
0 = disable LTCCLK  
1 = enable LTCCLK  
Bit 9: Low-Speed (T1/E1) Receive Port Common Clock Enable (LRCCEN). When this bit is set high, the  
LRCLK1 to LRCLK28 and LRCLKA and LRCLKB outputs will all be sourced from the LRCCLK input. This  
configuration can only be used in applications where it can be insured that all of the T1 or E1 channels from the far  
end are being sourced from a common clock.  
0 = disable LRCCLK  
1 = enable LRCCLK  
Bit 10: High-Speed (T3/E3) Data Enable Mode Select (DENMS). When this bit is set low, the FRDEN and  
FTDEN outputs will be asserted during payload data and deasserted during overhead data. When this bit is high,  
FRDEN and FTDEN are gapped clocks that pulse during payload data and are suppressed during overhead data.  
0 = FRDEN and FTDEN are data enables  
1 = FRDEN and FTDEN are gapped clocks  
Bit 11: Low-Speed (T1/E1) Port Loop Timed Mode (LLTM). When this bit is set low, the low-speed T1 and E1  
receive clocks (LRCLK) are not routed to the transmit side. When this bit is high, the LRCLKs are routed to the  
transmit side to be used as the transmit T1 and E1 clocks. When enabled, all the low-speed ports are looped timed.  
This control bit affects all the low-speed ports. The device is not capable of setting individual low-speed ports into  
and out of looped timed mode. See the block diagram in Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 for more details.  
0 = disable loop timed mode (LRCLK is not used to replace the associated LTCLK)  
1 = enable loop timed mode (LRCLK replaces the associated LTCLK)  
35 of 133  
DS3112  
Register Name:  
MC2  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
Master Configuration Register 2  
04h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
6
5
HTDATL  
0
4
HTDATH  
0
3
2
1
0
HTCLKI  
HRDATI HRCLKI HTDATI  
0
0
0
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
LRDATI  
0
10  
LRCLKI  
0
9
LTDATI  
0
8
LTCLKI  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bit 0: HTCLK Invert Enable (HTCLKI).  
0 = do not invert the HTCLK signal (normal mode)  
1 = invert the HTCLK signal (inverted mode)  
Bit 1: HTPOS/HTNEG Invert Enable (HTDATI).  
0 = do not invert the HTPOS and HTNEG signals (normal mode)  
1 = invert the HTPOS and HTNEG signals (inverted mode)  
Bit 2: HRCLK Invert Enable (HRCLKI).  
0 = do not invert the HRCLK signal (normal mode)  
1 = invert the HRCLK signal (inverted mode)  
Bit 3: HRPOS/HRNEG Invert Enable (HTDATI).  
0 = do not invert the HRPOS and HRNEG signals (normal mode)  
1 = invert the HRPOS and HRNEG signals (inverted mode)  
Bit 4: HTPOS/HTNEG Force High Disable (HTDATH). Note that this bit must be set by the host in order for  
T3/E3 traffic to be output from the device.  
0 = force the HTPOS and HTNEG signals high (force high mode)  
1 = allow normal transmit data to appear at the HTPOS and HTNEG signals (normal mode)  
Bit 5: HTPOS/HTNEG Force Low Enable (HTDATL).  
0 = allow normal transmit data to appear at the HTPOS and HTNEG signals (normal mode)  
1 = force the HTPOS and HTNEG signals low (force low mode)  
Bit 8: LTCLK Invert Enable (LTCLKI).  
0 = do not invert the LTCLK[n], LTCLKA, LTCLKB, and LTCCLK signals (normal mode)  
1 = invert the LTCLK[n], LTCLKA, LTCLKB, and LTCCLK signals (inverted mode)  
Bit 9: LTDAT Invert Enable (LTDATI).  
0 = do not invert the LTDAT[n], LTDATA and LTDATB signals (normal mode)  
1 = invert the LTDAT[n], LTDATA and LTDATB signals (inverted mode)  
Bit 10: LRCLK Invert Enable (LRCLKI).  
0 = do not invert the LRCLK[n], LRCLKA, LRCLKB, and LRCCLK signals (normal mode)  
1 = invert the LRCLK[n], LRCLKA, LRCLKB, and LRCCLK signals (inverted mode)  
Bit 11: LRDAT Invert Enable (LRDATI).  
0 = do not invert the LRDAT[n], LRDATA and LRDATB signals (normal mode)  
1 = invert the LRDAT[n], LRDATA and LRDATB signals (inverted mode)  
36 of 133  
DS3112  
Register Name:  
MC3  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
Master Configuration Register 3  
06h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
FRSOFI  
0
6
FRCLKI  
0
5
FRDI  
0
4
FRDENI  
0
3
FTSOFI  
0
2
FTCLKI  
0
1
FTDI  
0
0
FTDENI  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bit 0: FTDEN Invert Enable (FTDENI).  
0 = do not invert the FTDEN signal (normal mode)  
1 = invert the FTDEN signal (inverted mode)  
Bit 1: FTD Invert Enable (FTDI).  
0 = do not invert the FTD signal (normal mode)  
1 = invert the FTD signal (inverted mode)  
Bit 2: FTCLK Invert Enable (FTCLKI).  
0 = do not invert the FTCLK signal (normal mode)  
1 = invert the FTCLK signal (inverted mode)  
Bit 3: FTSOF Invert Enable (FTSOFI).  
0 = do not invert the FTSOF signal (normal mode)  
1 = invert the FTSOF signal (inverted mode)  
Bit 4: FRDEN Invert Enable (FRDENI).  
0 = do not invert the FRDEN signal (normal mode)  
1 = invert the FRDEN signal (inverted mode)  
Bit 5: FRD Invert Enable (FRDI).  
0 = do not invert the FRD signal (normal mode)  
1 = invert the FRD signal (inverted mode)  
Bit 6: FRCLK Invert Enable (FRCLKI).  
0 = do not invert the FRCLK signal (normal mode)  
1 = invert the FRCLK signal (inverted mode)  
Bit 7: FRSOF Invert Enable (FRSOFI).  
0 = do not invert the FRSOF signal (normal mode)  
1 = invert the FRSOF signal (inverted mode)  
37 of 133  
DS3112  
4.3 Master Status and Interrupt Register Description  
4.3.1 Status Registers  
The status registers in the DS3112 allow the host to monitor the real-time condition of the device. Most of  
the status bits in the device can cause a hardware interrupt to occur. Also, most of the status bits within  
the device are latched to ensure that the host can detect changes in state and the true status of the device.  
There are three types of status bits in the DS3112. The first type is called an event status bit and is  
derived from a momentary condition or state that occurs within the device. The event status bits are  
always cleared when read and can generate an interrupt when they are asserted. An example of an event  
status bit is the one-second timer boundary occurrence (OST).  
The second type of status bit is called an alarm status bit, which is derived from conditions that can occur  
for longer than an instance. The alarm status bits will be cleared when read unless the alarm is still  
present. The alarm status bits generate interrupts on a change in state in the alarm (i.e., when it is asserted  
or deasserted). An example of an alarm status bit is the loss of frame (LOF).  
The third type of status bit is called a real-time status bit. The real-time status bit remains active as long  
as the condition exists and will generate an interrupt as long as the condition exists. An example of a real-  
time status bit is the loss of transmit clock (LOTC).  
Figure 4-1. Event Status Bit  
Internal Signal  
Status Bit  
Interrupt  
Read  
Figure 4-2. Alarm Status Bit  
Internal Signal  
Status Bit  
Interrupt  
Read  
38 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Figure 4-3. Real-Time Status Bit  
Internal Signal  
Status Bit  
Interrupt  
Read  
4.3.2 MSR  
The Master Status Register (MSR) is a special status register that can be used to help the host quickly  
locate changes in device status. There is a status bit in the MSR for each of the major blocks within the  
DS3112. When an alarm or event occurs in one of these blocks, the device can be configured to set a bit  
in the MSR. Status bits in the MSR can also cause a hardware interrupt to occur. In either polled or  
interrupt driven software routines, the host can first read the MSR to locate which status registers need to  
be serviced.  
Register Name:  
MSR  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
Master Status Register  
08h  
Bit #  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name  
Default  
T2E2SR2 T2E2SR1  
FEAC  
HDLC  
BERT  
COVF  
OST  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
G.747  
12  
T3E3MS  
11  
LORC  
10  
LOTC  
9
T3E3SR  
8
T1LB  
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bit 0: One-Second Timer Boundary Occurrence (OST). This latched read-only event-status bit will be set to a  
one on each one-second boundary as timed by the DS3112. The device chooses an arbitrary one-second boundary  
that is timed from the HRCLK signal. This bit will be cleared when read and will not be set again until another  
one-second boundary has occurred. The setting of this status bit can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if the OST  
bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) register is set to a one. The interrupt will be allowed to clear when this  
bit is read.  
Bit 1: Counter Overflow Event (COVF). This latched read-only event-status bit will be set to a one if any of the  
error counters saturates (the error counters saturate when full). This bit will be cleared when read even if one or  
more of the error counters is still saturated. The setting of this status bit can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if  
the COVF bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) register is set to a one. The interrupt will be allowed to clear  
when this bit is read.  
Bit 2: Change in BERT Status (BERT). This read-only real-time status bit will be set to a one if there is a major  
change of status in the BERT receiver and the associated interrupt enable bit is set in the BERTCO register. A  
major change of status is defined as either a change in the receive synchronization (i.e., the BERT has gone into or  
out of receive synchronization), a bit error has been detected, or an overflow has occurred in either the Bit Counter  
or the Error Counter. The host must read the status bits of the BERT in the BERT Status Register (BERTEC0) to  
39 of 133  
 
DS3112  
determine the change of state. This bit will be cleared when the BERTEC0 is read and will not be set again until  
the BERT has experienced another change of state. The setting of this status bit can cause a hardware interrupt to  
occur if the BERT bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) register is set to a one. The interrupt will be allowed  
to clear when the BERTEC0 register is read (Figure 4-4).  
Bit 3: Change in HDLC Status (HDLC). This read-only real-time status bit will be set to a one if there is a  
change of status in the HDLC controller and the associated interrupt enable bit is set in the IHSR register. The host  
must read the status bits of the HDLC in the HDLC Status Register (HSR) to determine the change of state. This bit  
will be cleared when the HSR is read and will not be set again until the HDLC has experienced another change of  
state. The setting of this status bit can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if the HDLC bit in the Interrupt Mask for  
MSR (IMSR) register is set to a one. The interrupt will be allowed to clear when the HSR register is read  
(see Figure 4-5).  
Bit 4: Change in FEAC Status (FEAC). This read-only real-time status bit will be set to a one when the FEAC  
controller has detected and verified a new Far End Alarm and Control (FEAC) 16-bit codeword. This bit will be  
cleared when the FEAC Status Register (FSR) is read and will not be set again until the FEAC controller has  
detected and verified another new codeword. The setting of this status bit can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if  
the FEAC bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) register is set to a one. The interrupt will be allowed to clear  
when the FSR register is read.  
Bit 5: Change in T2/E2 LOF or AIS Status (T2E2SR1). This read-only real-time status bit will be set to a one  
when one or more of the T2/E2/G.747 framers have detected a change in either Loss Of Frame (LOF) or Alarm  
Indication Signal (AIS) and the associated interrupt enable bit is set in the T2E2SR1 register. See the T2E2SR1  
register description in Section 6.3 for more details. This bit will be cleared when the T2E2SR1 register is read. The  
setting of this status bit can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if the T2E2SR1 bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR  
(IMSR) register is set to a one. The interrupt will be allowed to clear when the T2E2SR1 register is read (see  
Figure 4-6).  
Bit 6: Change in T2/E2 RAI Status (T2E2SR2). This read-only real-time status bit will be set to a one when one  
or more of the T2/E2/G.747 framers have detected a change in the detection of the Remote Alarm Indication (RAI)  
signal and the interrupt enable (bit 7) is set in the T2E2SR2 register. See the T2E2SR2 register description in  
Section 6.3 for more details. This bit will be cleared when the T2E2SR2 register is read. The setting of this status  
bit can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if the T2E2SR2 bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) register is set  
to a one. The interrupt will be allowed to clear when the T2E2SR2 register is read (see Figure 4-7).  
Bit 8: T1 Loopback Detected (T1LB). This read-only real-time status bit will be set to a one when one or more of  
the T2 framers have detects an active T1 loopback command. See the T1LBSR1 and T1LBSR2 register  
descriptions in Section 7.3 for more details. This bit will be cleared when the T1 loopback command is no longer  
active on any of the lines. The setting of this status bit can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if the T1LB bit in  
the Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) register is set to a one. The interrupt will be allowed to clear when the none of  
the T2 framers detects an active T1 loopback command (see Figure 4-8).  
Bit 9: Change in T3/E3 Framer Status (T3E3SR). This read-only real-time status bit will be set to a one when  
the T3/E3 framer has detected a change in RAI, AIS, LOF, LOS, or T3 Idle signal or has detected the start of a  
Transmit or Receive Frame and the associated interrupt enable bit is set in the T3E3SR register. See the T3E3SR  
register description in Section 5.3 for more details. This bit will be cleared when the T3E3SR register is read. The  
setting of this status bit can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if the T3E3SR bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR  
(IMSR) register is set to a one. The interrupt will be allowed to clear when the T3E3SR register is read (see  
Figure 4-9).  
Bit 10: Loss Of Transmit Clock Detected (LOTC). This read-only real-time status bit will be set to a one when  
the device detects that the FTCLK clock has not toggled for 200ns (±100ns). This bit will be cleared when a clock  
is detected at the FTCLK input. The setting of this status bit can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if the LOTC  
bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) register is set to a one. The interrupt will be allowed to clear when the  
40 of 133  
DS3112  
device detects a clock at FTCLK. The HRCLK checks for the presence of the FTCLK. On reset, both the LOTC  
and LORC status bits will be set and then immediately cleared if the clock is present.  
Bit 11: Loss Of Receive Clock Detected (LORC). This read-only real-time status bit will be set to a one when the  
device detects that the HRCLK clock has not toggled for 200ns (±100ns). This bit will be cleared when a clock is  
detected at the HRCLK input. The setting of this status bit can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if the LORC bit  
in the Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) register is set to a one. The interrupt will be allowed to clear when the  
device detects a clock at HRCLK. The FTCLK checks for the presence of the HRCLK. On reset, both the LOTC  
and LORC status bits will be set and then immediately cleared if the clock is present.  
Bit 12: State of the T3E3MS Input Signal (T3E3MS). This read-only real-time status bit reflects the current state  
of the external T3E3MS input signal. This status bit cannot generate an interrupt.  
Bit 13: State of the G.747E Input Signal (G.747E). This read-only real-time status bit reflects the current state of  
the external G.747E input signal. This status bit cannot generate an interrupt.  
Figure 4-4. BERT Status Bit Flow  
Internal RLOS  
Signal from  
BERT  
RLOS  
(BERTEC0  
Bit 4)  
Alarm Latch  
Change in State Detect  
IESYNC (BERTC0 Bit 15)  
Event Latch  
Mask  
BED  
(BERTEC0  
Bit 3)  
Internal Bit  
Error Detected  
Signal from  
BERT  
Event Latch  
BERT  
Mask  
Mask  
Status Bit  
(MSR Bit 2)  
OR  
IEBED (BERTC0 Bit 14)  
INT*  
Hardware  
Signal  
BECO or BBCO  
(BERTEC0  
Bits 1 & 2)  
Internal Counter  
Overflow  
Signal from  
BERT  
Mask  
Event Latch  
BERT  
(IMSR Bit 2)  
IEOF (BERTC0 Bit 13)  
NOTE: ALL EVENT AND ALARM LATCHES ABOVE ARE CLEARED WHEN THE BERTEC0 REGISTER IS READ.  
41 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Figure 4-5. HDLC Status Bit Flow  
Transmit  
TEND  
(HSR Bit 0)  
Event Latch  
Packet End  
Signal from  
HDLC  
Mask  
Mask  
TEND (IHSR Bit 0)  
Internal Transmit  
Low Water Mark  
Signal from  
TLWM  
(HSR Bit 2)  
HDLC  
TLWM (IHSR Bit 2)  
Internal Receive  
High Water Mark  
Signal from  
RHWM  
(HSR Bit 4)  
HDLC  
Mask  
Mask  
RHWM (IHSR Bit 4)  
Internal Receive  
Packet Start  
Signal from  
HDLC  
RPS  
(HSR Bit 5)  
Event Latch  
Event Latch  
Event Latch  
Event Latch  
RPS (IHSR Bit 5)  
HDLC  
Status Bit  
(MSR Bit 3)  
Internal Receive  
Packet End  
Signal from  
HDLC  
RPE  
(HSR Bit 6)  
OR  
INT*  
Hardware  
Signal  
Mask  
Mask  
RPE (IHSR Bit 6)  
HDLC  
(IMSR Bit 3)  
Internal Transmit  
FIFO Underrun  
Signal from  
HDLC  
TUDR  
(HSR Bit 7)  
Mask  
Mask  
Mask  
TUDR (IHSR Bit 3)  
Internal Receive  
FIFO Overrun  
Signal from  
HDLC  
ROVR  
(HSR Bit 13)  
ROVR (IHSR Bit 13)  
RABT  
Internal Receive  
Abort Detect  
Signal from  
HDLC  
Event Latch  
(HSR Bit 15)  
RABT (IHSR Bit 15)  
NOTE: ALL EVENT LATCHES ABOVE ARE CLEARED WHEN THE HSR REGISTER IS READ.  
42 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Figure 4-6. T2E2SR1 Status Bit Flow  
Internal LOF  
Signal from  
T2/E2 Framer 1  
LOF1  
(T2E2SR1  
Bit 0)  
Alarm Latch  
Event  
Latch  
Change in State Detect  
Internal LOF  
Signal from  
T2/E2 Framer 2  
LOF2  
(T2E2SR1  
Bit 1)  
Alarm Latch  
Event  
Latch  
Change in State Detect  
OR  
Mask  
IELOF  
(T2E2SR1  
Bit 7)  
Internal LOF  
Signal from  
T2 Framer 7  
LOF7  
(T2E2SR1  
Bit 6)  
Alarm Latch  
Event  
Latch  
Change in State Detect  
T2E2SR1  
Status Bit  
(MSR Bit 5)  
OR  
INT*  
Hardware  
Signal  
Mask  
Internal AIS  
AIS1  
Signal from  
T2/E2 Framer 1  
(T2E2SR1  
Bit 8)  
Alarm Latch  
T2E2SR1  
(IMSR Bit 5)  
Event  
Latch  
Change in State Detect  
Internal AIS  
AIS2  
(T2E2SR1  
Bit 9)  
Signal from  
T2/E2 Framer 2  
Alarm Latch  
Event  
Latch  
Change in State Detect  
OR  
Mask  
IEAIS  
(T2E2SR1  
Bit 15)  
Internal AIS  
Signal from  
T2 Framer 7  
AIS7  
(T2E2SR1  
Bit 14)  
Alarm Latch  
Event  
Latch  
Change in State Detect  
NOTE: ALL EVENT AND ALARM LATCHES ABOVE ARE CLEARED WHEN THE T2E2SR1 REGISTER IS READ.  
43 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Figure 4-7. T2E2SR2 Status Bit Flow  
Internal RAI  
Signal from  
T2/E2 Framer 1  
RAI1  
(T2E2SR2  
Bit 0)  
Alarm Latch  
Change in State Detect  
Event Latch  
Event Latch  
Internal RAI  
Signal from  
T2/E2 Framer 2  
RAI2  
(T2E2SR2  
Bit 1)  
Alarm Latch  
Change in State Detect  
T2E2SR2  
Status Bit  
(MSR Bit 6)  
OR  
Mask  
INT*  
Hardware  
Signal  
Mask  
IERAI  
(T2E2SR2  
Bit 7)  
Internal RAI  
Signal from  
T2 Framer 7  
RAI7  
(T2E2SR2  
Bit 6)  
Alarm Latch  
T2E2SR2  
(IMSR Bit 6)  
Change in State Detect  
Event Latch  
NOTE: ALL EVENT AND ALARM LATCHES ABOVE ARE CLEARED WHEN THE T2E2SR2 REGISTER IS READ.  
Figure 4-8. T1LB Status Bit Flow  
LLB1  
(T1LBSR1  
Bit 0)  
Internal T1  
Loopback Command  
Signal from  
T2/E2 Framer  
LLB2  
(T1LBSR1  
Bit 1)  
Internal T1  
Loopback Command  
Signal from  
T2/E2 Framer  
T1LB  
Status Bit  
(MSR Bit 8)  
OR  
INT*  
Hardware  
Signal  
Mask  
LLB28  
(T1LBSR2  
Bit 11)  
Internal T1  
Loopback Command  
Signal from  
T1LB  
(IMSR Bit 8)  
T2/E2 Framer  
44 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Figure 4-9. T3E3SR Status Bit Flow  
Receive LOS  
Signal from  
T3/E3 Framer  
LOS  
(T3E3SR Bit 0)  
Alarm Latch  
Change in State Detect  
Event Latch  
Mask  
Mask  
Mask  
Mask  
Mask  
Mask  
Mask  
LOS (IT3E3SR Bit 0)  
Receive LOF  
Signal from  
T3/E3 Framer  
LOF  
(T3E3SR Bit 1)  
Alarm Latch  
Change in State Detect  
Event Latch  
LOF (IT3E3SR Bit 1)  
Receive AIS  
Signal from  
T3/E3 Framer  
AIS  
Alarm Latch  
(T3E3SR Bit 2)  
Change in State Detect  
Event Latch  
AIS (IT3E3SR Bit 2)  
Receive RAI  
Signal from  
T3/E3 Framer  
AIS  
Alarm Latch  
(T3E3SR Bit 3)  
T3E3SR  
Change in State Detect  
Event Latch  
Status Bit  
(MSR Bit 9)  
OR  
AIS (IT3E3SR Bit 3)  
INT*  
Hardware  
Signal  
Mask  
Receive Idle  
Signal from  
T3/E3 Framer  
T3IDLE  
(T3E3SR Bit 4)  
Alarm Latch  
T3E3SR  
(IMSR Bit 9)  
Change in State Detect  
Event Latch  
T3IDLE (IT3E3SR Bit 4)  
Receive Start  
Of Frame  
Signal from  
RSOF  
(T3E3SR Bit 5)  
Event Latch  
Event Latch  
T3/E3 Framer  
RSOF (IT3E3SR Bit 5)  
Transmit Start  
Of Frame  
Signal from  
T3/E3 Framer  
TSOF  
(T3E3SR Bit 6)  
TSOF (IT3E3SR Bit 6)  
NOTE: ALL EVENT AND ALARM LATCHES ABOVE ARE CLEARED WHEN THE T3E3SR REGISTER IS READ.  
45 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Register Name:  
IMSR  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
Interrupt Mask for Master Status Register  
0Ah  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
6
5
4
FEAC  
0
3
HDLC  
0
2
BERT  
0
1
COVF  
0
0
OST  
0
T2E2SR2 T2E2SR1  
0
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
LORC  
0
10  
LOTC  
0
9
T3E3SR  
0
8
T1LB  
0
Bit 0: One-Second Timer Boundary Occurrence (OST).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 1: Counter Overflow Event (COVF).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 2: Change in BERT Status (BERT).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 3: Change in HDLC Status (HDLC).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 4: Change in FEAC Status (FEAC).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 5: Change in T2/E2 LOF or AIS Status (T2E2SR1).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 6: Change in T2/E2 RAI Status (T2E2SR2).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 8: T1 Loopback Detected (T1LB).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 9: Change in T3/E3 Framer Status (T3E3SR).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 10: Loss Of Transmit Clock (LOTC).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 11: Loss Of Receive Clock (LORC).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
46 of 133  
DS3112  
4.4 Test Register Description  
Register Name:  
TEST  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
Test Register  
0Ch  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
6
5
FT5  
0
4
FT4  
0
3
FT3  
0
2
FT2  
0
1
FT1  
0
0
FT0  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
Bits 0 to 5: Factory Test Bits (FT0 to FT5). These bits are used by the factory to place the DS3112 into the test  
mode. For normal device operation, these bits should be set to zero whenever this register is written to.  
47 of 133  
 
DS3112  
5 T3/E3 FRAMER  
On the receive side, the T3/E3 framer locates the frame boundaries of the incoming T3 or E3 data stream  
and monitors the data stream for alarms and errors. Alarms are detected and reported in T3/E3 Status  
Register (T3E3SR) and the T3/E3 Information Register (T3E3INFO), which are described in Section 5.3.  
Errors are accumulated in a set of error counters (Section 5.4). The host can force the T3/E3 framer to  
resynchronize via the T3E3RSY control bit in the MRID register (Section 4.1). On the transmit side, the  
device formats the outgoing data stream with the proper framing pattern and overhead and can generate  
alarms. It can also inject errors for diagnostic testing purposes (T3E3EIC register). The transmit side of  
the framer is called the “formatter.”  
The T3/E3 framer and formatter can be used in conjunction with the multiplexer or as a stand-alone  
framer. This selection is made in the Master Configuration 1 (MC1) register (Section 4.2).  
5.1 T3/E3 Line Loopback  
The line loopback loops the incoming T3/E3 data (the HRCLK, HRPOS, and HRNEG inputs) directly  
back to the transmit side (the HTCLK, HTPOS, and HTNEG outputs). When this loopback is enabled, the  
incoming receive data continues to pass through the device but the data output from the T3/E3 formatter  
is replaced with the data being input to the device. See the block diagrams in Section 1 for a visual  
description of this loopback.  
5.2 T3/E3 Diagnostic Loopback  
The diagnostic loopback loops the outgoing T3/E3 data from the T3/E3 formatter back to receive side  
framer. When this loopback is enabled, the incoming receive data at HRCLK, HRPOS, and HRNEG is  
ignored. See the block diagrams in Section 1 for a visual description of this loopback. Please note that the  
device can still generate AIS at the HTCLK, HTPOS, and HTNEG outputs when this loopback is  
invoked. This is important to keep the data that is being looped back from disturbing downstream  
equipment.  
5.3 T3/E3 Payload Loopback  
The payload loopback loops the framed T3/E3 data from the receive side framer back to the transmit side  
formatter. When this loopback is enabled, the incoming receive data continues to pass through the device  
but the data normally being input to the T3/E3 formatter is ignored. See the block diagrams in Section 1  
for a visual description of this loopback.  
48 of 133  
 
 
 
DS3112  
5.4 T3/E3 Framer Control Register Description  
Register Name:  
T3E3CR  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T3/E3 Control Register  
10h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
DLB  
0
6
LLB  
0
5
T3IDLE  
0
4
E3SnC1  
0
3
E3SnC0  
0
2
TPT  
0
1
TRAI  
0
0
TAIS  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
PLB  
0
13  
TFEBE  
0
12  
AFEBED  
0
11  
ECC  
0
10  
FECC1  
0
9
FECC0  
0
8
E3CVE  
0
Bit 0: T3/E3 Transmit Alarm Indication Signal (TAIS). When this bit is set high in the T3 mode, the transmitter  
will generate a properly F-bit and M-bit framed 101010... data pattern with both X bits set to one, all C bits set to  
zero, and the proper P bits. This is true regardless of whether the device is in the C-Bit Parity mode or not. When  
this bit is set high in the E3 mode, the transmitter will generate an unframed all ones. When this bit it set low,  
normal data is transmitted.  
0 = do not transmit AIS  
1 = transmit AIS  
Bit 1: T3/E3 Transmit Remote Alarm Indication (TRAI). When this bit is set high in the T3 mode, both X bits  
will be set to a zero. When this bit is set high in the E3 mode, the RAI bit (bit number 11 of each E3 frame) will be  
set to a one. When this bit it set low in the T3 mode, both X bits will be set to one. When this bit is set low in the  
E3 mode, the RAI bit will be set to a zero.  
0 = do not transmit RAI  
1 = transmit RAI  
Bit 2: T3/E3 Transmit Pass Through Enable (TPT).  
0 = enable the framer to insert framing and overhead bits  
1 = framer will not insert any framing or overhead bits  
Bits 3 and 4: E3 National Bit Control Bits 0 and 1 (E3SnC0 and E3SnC1). These bits determine from where the  
E3 national bit is sourced. On the receive side, the Sn bit is always routed to the T3E3INFO Register as well as the  
HDLC controller and the FEAC controller. These bits are ignored in the T3 mode.  
E3SnC1  
E3SnC0  
SOURCE OF THE E3 NATIONAL BIT (Sn)  
Force the Sn bit to one  
Use the HDLC controller to source the Sn bit  
Use the FEAC controller to source the Sn bit  
Force the Sn bit to zero  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Bit 5: Transmit T3 Idle Signal Enable (T3IDLE). When this bit is set high, the T3 Idle Signal will be transmitted  
instead of the normal transmit data. The T3 Idle Signal is defined as a normally T3 framed pattern (i.e., with the  
proper F bits and M bits along with the proper P bits) where the information bit fields are completely filled with a  
data pattern of ...1100... and the C bits in Subframe 3 are set to zero and both X bits are set to one. This bit is  
ignored in the E3 mode.  
0 = transmit data normally  
1 = transmit T3 Idle Signal  
Bit 6: T3/E3 Line Loopback Enable (LLB). See Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 for a visual description of this  
loopback.  
0 = disable loopback  
1 = enable loopback  
49 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Bit 7: T3/E3 Diagnostic Loopback Enable (DLB). See Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 for a visual description of this  
loopback.  
0 = disable loopback  
1 = enable loopback  
Bit 8: E3 Code Violation Enable (E3CVE). This bit is ignored in the T3 mode. This bit is used in the E3 mode to  
configure the BiPolar Violation Count Register (BPVCR) to count either BiPolar Violations (BPV) or Code  
Violations (CV). A BPV is defined as consecutive pulses (or marks) of the same polarity that are not part of a  
HDB3 codeword. A CV is defined in ITU O.161 as consecutive BPVs of the same polarity.  
0 = count BPV  
1 = count CV  
Bits 9 and 10: T3/E3 Frame Error Counting Control Bits 0 and 1 (FECC0 and FECC1).  
FECC1  
FECC0 FRAME ERROR COUNT REGISTER (FECR) CONFIGURATION  
T3 Mode: Count Loss Of Frame (LOF) Occurrences  
E3 Mode: Count Loss Of Frame (LOF) Occurrences  
0
0
T3 Mode: Count Both F Bit and M Bit Errors  
E3 Mode: Count Bit Errors in the FAS Word  
T3 Mode: Count Only F Bit Errors  
E3 Mode: Count Word Errors in the FAS Word  
T3 Mode: Count Only M Bit Errors  
E3 Mode: Illegal State  
0
1
1
1
0
1
Bit 11: Error Counting Control (ECC). This bit is used to control whether the device will increment the error  
counters during Loss Of Frame (LOF) conditions. It only affects the error counters that count errors that are based  
on framed information and these include the following:  
Frame Error Counter (when it is configured to count frame errors, not LOF occurrences)  
T3 Parity Bit Error Counter  
T3 C-Bit Parity Error Counter  
T3 Far End Block Error or E3 RAI Counter  
When this bit is set low, these error counters will not be allowed to increment during LOF conditions. When this bit  
is set high, these error counters will be allowed to increment during LOF conditions.  
0 = stop the FECR/PCR/CPCR/FEBECR error counters from incrementing during LOF  
1 = allow the FECR/PCR/CPCR/FEBECR error counters to increment during LOF  
Bit 12: Automatic FEBE Defeat (AFEBED). This bit is ignored in the E3 mode and in the T3 mode when the  
device is not configured in the C-Bit Parity Mode. When this bit is low, the device will automatically insert the  
FEBE codes into the transmitted data stream by setting all three C bits in Subframe 4 to zero.  
0 = automatically insert FEBE codes in the transmit data stream based on detected errors  
1 = use the TFEBE control to determine the state of the FEBE codes  
Bit 13: Transmit FEBE Setting (TFEBE). This bit is only active when AFEBED is active (i.e., AFEBED = 1).  
When this bit is low, the device will force the FEBE code to 111 continuously. When this bit is set high, the device  
will force the FEBE code to 000 continuously.  
0 = force FEBE to 111 (null state)  
1 = force FEBE to 000 (active state)  
Bit 14: T3/E3 Payload Loopback Enable (PLB). See Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 for a visual description of this  
loopback.  
0 = disable loopback  
1 = enable loopback  
50 of 133  
DS3112  
Register Name:  
T3E3EIC  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T3/E3 Error Insert Control Register  
18h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
MEIMS  
0
6
FBEIC1  
0
5
FBEIC0  
0
4
FBEI  
0
3
T3CPBEI  
0
2
T3PBEI  
0
1
EXZI  
0
0
BPVI  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
Bit 0: BiPolar Violation Insert (BPVI). A zero to one transition on this bit will cause a single BPV to be inserted  
into the transmit data stream. Once this bit has been toggled from a 0 to a 1, the device waits for the next  
occurrence of three consecutive ones to insert the BPV. This bit must be cleared and set again for a subsequent  
error to be inserted. Toggling this bit has no affect when the T3/E3 interface is in the Unipolar Mode (Section 4.2  
for details about the Unipolar Mode). In the manual error insert mode (MEIMS = 1), errors will be inserted on each  
toggle of the FTMEI input signal as long as this bit is set high. When this bit is set low, no errors will be inserted.  
Bit 1: Excessive Zero Insert (EXZI). A zero to one transition on this bit will cause a single EXZ event to be  
inserted into the transmit data stream. An EXZ event is defined as three or more consecutive zeros in the T3 mode  
and four or more consecutive zeros in the E3 mode. Once this bit has been toggled from a zero to a one, the device  
waits for the next possible B3ZS/HDB3 codeword insertion and it suppresses that codeword from being inserted  
and hence this creates the EXZ event. This bit must be cleared and set again for a subsequent error to be inserted.  
Toggling this bit has no affect when the T3/E3 interface is in the Unipolar Mode (Section 4.2 for details about the  
Unipolar Mode). In the Manual Error Insert mode (MEIMS = 1), errors will be inserted on each toggle of the  
FTMEI input signal as long as this bit is set high. When this bit is set low, no errors will be inserted.  
Bit 2: T3 Parity Bit Error Insert (T3PBEI). A zero to one transition on this bit will cause a single T3 parity error  
event to be inserted into the transmit data stream. A T3 parity event is defined as flipping the proper polarity of  
both the P bits in a T3 Frame. (See Section 14.5 for details about the P bits.) Once this bit has been toggled from a  
zero to a one, the device waits for the next T3 frame to flip both P bits. This bit must be cleared and set again for a  
subsequent error to be inserted. Toggling this bit has no affect when the device is operated in the E3 mode. In the  
Manual Error Insert mode (MEIMS = 1), errors will be inserted on each toggle of the FTMEI input signal as long  
as this bit is set high. When this bit is set low, no errors will be inserted.  
Bit 3: T3 C-Bit Parity Error Insert (T3CPBEI). A zero to one transition on this bit will cause a single T3 C-Bit  
parity error event to be inserted into the transmit data stream. A T3 parity event is defined as flipping the proper  
polarity of all three CP bits in a T3 Frame. (See Section 14.7 for details about the CP bits.) Once this bit has been  
toggled from a zero to a one, the device waits for the next T3 frame to flip the three CP bits. This bit must be  
cleared and set again for a subsequent error to be inserted. Toggling this bit has no affect when the T3 framer is not  
operated in the C-Bit parity mode (See Section 14.7 for details about the C-Bit Parity mode.) or when the device is  
operated in the E3 mode. In the Manual Error Insert mode (MEIMS = 1), errors will be inserted on each toggle of  
the FTMEI input signal as long as this bit is set high. When this bit is set low, no errors will be inserted.  
Bit 4: Frame Bit Error Insert (FBEI). A zero to one transition on this bit will cause the transmit framer to  
generate framing bit errors. The type of framing bit errors inserted is controlled by the FBEIC0 and FBEIC1 bits  
(see discussion below). Once this bit has been toggled from a 0 to a 1, the device waits for the next possible  
framing bit to insert the errors. This bit must be cleared and set again for a subsequent error to be inserted. In the  
Manual Error Insert mode (MEIMS = 1), errors will be inserted on each toggle of the FTMEI input signal as long  
as this bit is set high. When this bit is set low, no errors will be inserted.  
51 of 133  
DS3112  
Bits 5 and 6: Frame Bit Error Insert Control Bits 0 and 1 (FBEIC0 and FBEIC1).  
FBEIC1  
FBEIC0  
TYPE OF FRAMING BIT ERROR INSERTED  
T3 Mode: A single F-bit error  
0
0
E3 Mode: A single FAS word of 1111000000 is generated instead of the normal FAS  
word, which is 1111010000 (i.e., only 1 bit inverted)  
T3 Mode: A single M-bit error  
0
1
1
0
E3 Mode: A single FAS word of 0000101111 is generated instead of the normal FAS  
word, which is 1111010000 (i.e., all FAS bits are inverted)  
T3 Mode: Four consecutive F-bit errors (causes the far end to lose synchronization)  
E3 Mode: Four consecutive FAS words of 1111000000 are generated instead of the  
normal FAS word, which is 1111010000 (i.e., only 1 bit inverted; causes the far end  
to lose synchronization)  
T3 Mode: Three consecutive M-bit errors (causes the far end to lose synchronization)  
E3 Mode: Four consecutive FAS words of 0000101111 are generated instead of the  
normal FAS word, which is 1111010000 (i.e., all FAS bits are inverted; causes the far  
end to lose synchronization)  
1
1
Bit 7: Manual Error Insert Mode Select (MEIMS). When this bit is set low, the device will insert errors on each  
0 to 1 transition of the BPVI, EXZI, T3PBEI, T3CPBEI, or FBEI control bits. When this bit is set high, the device  
will insert errors on each 0 to 1 transition of the FTMEI input signal. The appropriate BPVI, EXZI, T3PBEI,  
T3CPBEI, or FBEI control bit must be set to one for this to occur. If all of the BPVI, EXZI, T3PBEI, T3CPBEI,  
and FBEI control bits are set to zero, no errors are inserted.  
0 = use zero to one transition on the BPVI, EXZI, T3PBEI, T3CPBEI, or FBEI control bits to insert errors  
1 = use zero to one transition on the FTMEI input signal to insert errors  
52 of 133  
DS3112  
5.5 T3/E3 Framer Status and Interrupt Register Description  
Register Name:  
T3E3SR  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T3/E3 Status Register  
12h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
6
5
4
3
RAI  
2
AIS  
1
LOF  
0
LOS  
RSOF  
TSOF  
T3IDLE  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
Note: See Figure 5-1 for details on the signal flow for the status bits in the T3E3SR register. Bits that are underlined are read-only. All  
others are read-write.  
Bit 0: Loss Of Signal Occurrence (LOS). This latched read-only alarm-status bit will be set to a one when the T3  
or E3 framer detects a loss of signal. This bit will be cleared when read unless a LOS condition still exists. A  
change in state of the LOS can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if the LOS bit in the Interrupt Mask for T3E3SR  
(IT3E3SR) register is set to a one and the T3E3SR bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) register is set to a  
one. The interrupt will be allowed to clear when this bit is read. The LOS alarm criteria are described in Table 5-1  
and Table 5-2.  
Bit 1: Loss Of Frame Occurrence (LOF). This latched read-only alarm status bit will be set to a one when the T3  
or E3 framer detects a loss of frame. This bit will be cleared when read unless a LOF condition still exists. A  
change in state of the LOF can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if the LOF bit in the Interrupt Mask for T3E3SR  
(IT3E3SR) register is set to a one and the T3E3SR bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) register is set to a  
one. The interrupt will be allowed to clear when this bit is read. The LOF alarm criteria are described in Table 5-1  
and Table 5-2.  
Bit 2: Alarm Indication Signal Detected (AIS). This latched read-only alarm-status bit will be set to a one when  
the T3 or E3 framer detects an incoming Alarm Indication Signal. This bit will be cleared when read unless an AIS  
signal is still present. A change in state of the AIS detection can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if the AIS bit  
in the Interrupt Mask for T3E3SR (IT3E3SR) register is set to a one and the T3E3SR bit in the Interrupt Mask for  
MSR (IMSR) register is set to a one. The interrupt will be allowed to clear when this bit is read. The AIS alarm  
detection criteria is described in Table 5-1 and Table 5-2.  
Bit 3: Remote Alarm Indication Detected (RAI). This latched read-only alarm status bit will be set to a one when  
the T3 or E3 framer detects an incoming Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) signal. This bit will be cleared when read  
unless an RAI signal is still present. A change in state of the RAI detection can cause a hardware interrupt to occur  
if the RAI bit in the Interrupt Mask for T3E3SR (IT3E3SR) register is set to a one and the T3E3SR bit in the  
Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) register is set to a one. The interrupt will be allowed to clear when this bit is read.  
The RAI alarm detection criteria are described in Table 5-1 and Table 5-2. RAI can also be indicated via the FEAC  
codes when the device is operated in the C-Bit Parity Mode.  
Bit 4: T3 Idle Signal Detected (T3IDLE). This latched read-only alarm status bit will be set to a one when the T3  
framer detects an incoming idle signal. This bit will be cleared when read unless the idle signal is still present. A  
change in state of idle detection can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if the IDLE bit in the Interrupt Mask for  
T3E3SR (IT3E3SR) register is set to a one and the T3E3SR bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) register is  
set to a one. The IDLE detection criteria are described in Table 5-1. The interrupt will be allowed to clear when this  
bit is read. When the DS3112 is operated in the E3 mode, this status bit should be ignored.  
Bit 5: Transmit T3/E3 Start Of Frame (TSOF). This latched read-only event-status bit will be set to a one on  
each T3/E3 transmit frame boundary. This bit is a software version of the FTSOF hardware signal and it will be  
cleared when read. The setting of this bit can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if the TSOF bit in the Interrupt  
53 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Mask for T3E3SR (IT3E3SR) register is set to a one and the T3E3SR bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR)  
register is set to a one.  
Bit 6: Receive T3/E3 Start Of Frame (RSOF). This latched read-only event status bit will be set to a one on each  
T3/E3 receive frame boundary. This bit is a software version of the FRSOF hardware signal and it will be cleared  
when read. The setting of this bit can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if the RSOF bit in the Interrupt Mask for  
T3E3SR (IT3E3SR) register is set to a one and the T3E3SR bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) register is  
set to a one.  
Figure 5-1. T3E3SR Status Bit Flow  
Receive LOS  
Signal from  
T3/E3 Framer  
LOS  
(T3E3SR Bit 0)  
Alarm Latch  
Change in State Detect  
Event Latch  
Mask  
Mask  
Mask  
Mask  
Mask  
Mask  
Mask  
LOS (IT3E3SR Bit 0)  
Receive LOF  
Signal from  
T3/E3 Framer  
LOF  
(T3E3SR Bit 1)  
Alarm Latch  
Change in State Detect  
Event Latch  
LOF (IT3E3SR Bit 1)  
Receive AIS  
Signal from  
T3/E3 Framer  
AIS  
Alarm Latch  
(T3E3SR Bit 2)  
Change in State Detect  
Event Latch  
AIS (IT3E3SR Bit 2)  
Receive RAI  
Signal from  
T3/E3 Framer  
RAI  
Alarm Latch  
(T3E3SR Bit 3)  
T3E3SR  
Change in State Detect  
Event Latch  
Status Bit  
(MSR Bit 9)  
OR  
RAI (IT3E3SR Bit 3)  
INT*  
Hardware  
Signal  
Mask  
Receive Idle  
Signal from  
T3/E3 Framer  
T3IDLE  
(T3E3SR Bit 4)  
Alarm Latch  
T3E3SR  
(IMSR Bit 9)  
Change in State Detect  
Event Latch  
T3IDLE (IT3E3SR Bit 4)  
Receive Start  
Of Frame  
Signal from  
TSOF  
(T3E3SR Bit 5)  
Event Latch  
Event Latch  
T3/E3 Framer  
TSOF (IT3E3SR Bit 5)  
Transmit Start  
Of Frame  
Signal from  
T3/E3 Framer  
RSOF  
(T3E3SR Bit 6)  
RSOF (IT3E3SR Bit 6)  
NOTE: ALL EVENT AND ALARM LATCHES ABOVE ARE CLEARED WHEN THE T3E3SR REGISTER IS READ.  
54 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Register Name:  
IT3E3SR  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
Interrupt Mask for T3/E3 Status Register  
14h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
6
RSOF  
0
5
TSOF  
0
4
T3IDLE  
0
3
RAI  
0
2
AIS  
0
1
LOF  
0
0
LOS  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bit 0: Loss Of Signal Occurrence (LOS).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 1: Loss Of Frame Occurrence (LOF).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 2: Alarm Indication Signal Detected (AIS).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 3: Remote Alarm Indication Detected (RAI).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 4: T3 Idle Signal Detected (T3IDLE).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 5: Transmit T3/E3 Start Of Frame (TSOF).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 6: Receive T3/E3 Start Of Frame (RSOF).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
55 of 133  
DS3112  
Table 5-1. T3 Alarm Criteria  
ALARM/  
DEFINITION  
CONDITION  
SET CRITERIA  
CLEAR CRITERIA  
AIS  
Alarm Indication Signal  
Properly framed 1010...  
pattern, which is aligned  
with the 1 just after each  
overhead bit and all C bits  
are set to zero  
In each 84-bit information  
field, the properly aligned  
10... pattern is detected with  
less than 4-bit errors (out of  
84 possible) for 1024  
consecutive information bit  
fields (1.95ms) and all C bits  
are majority decoded to be  
zero during this time  
In each 84 bit information  
field, the properly aligned  
10... pattern is detected with  
4 or more bit errors (out of 84  
possible) for 1024  
consecutive information bit  
fields (1.95ms)  
LOS  
LOF  
Loss Of Signal  
(Note 2)  
192 consecutive zeros  
No EXZ events over a 192-  
bit window that starts with  
the first one received  
Loss Of Frame  
Three or more F bits in error  
Synchronization occurs  
Too many F bits or M bits in out of 16 consecutive, or 2 or  
error  
more M bits in error out of  
four consecutive  
RAI  
(Note 1)  
Remote Alarm Indication  
(This is also referred to as  
SEF/AIS in Bellcore GR-  
820)  
X1 and X2 = 0 for four  
consecutive M frames (426µs) consecutive M frames  
(426µs)  
X1 and X2 = 1 for four  
Inactive: X1 = X2 = 1  
Active: X1 = X2 = 0  
Idle Signal  
Properly framed 1100...  
pattern, which is aligned  
with the 11 just after each  
overhead bit and the C bits  
in Subframe 3 are zero.  
In each 84-bit information  
field, the properly aligned  
1100... pattern is detected with 1100... pattern is detected  
less than 4-bit errors (out of  
84 possible) for 1024  
consecutive information bit  
fields (1.95ms) and the C bits  
in Subframe 3 are majority  
decoded to be zero during this  
time.  
In each 84-bit information  
field, the properly aligned  
with four or more bit errors  
(out of 84 possible) for 1024  
consecutive information bit  
fields (1.95ms)  
Note 1: RAI can also be indicated via FEAC codes in the C-Bit Parity Mode  
Note 2: LOS is not defined for unipolar (binary) operation.  
56 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
Table 5-2. E3 Alarm Criteria  
ALARM/  
DEFINITION  
CONDITION  
SET CRITERIA  
CLEAR CRITERIA  
AIS  
Alarm Indication Signal  
Unframed all ones  
Four or fewer zeros in  
two consecutive 1536-  
bit frames  
Five or more zeros in two  
consecutive 1536-bit frames  
LOS  
Loss Of Signal  
(See note)  
192 consecutive zeros  
No EXZ events over a 192-bit  
window that starts with the  
first one received  
LOF  
RAI  
Loss Of Frame  
Too many FAS errors  
Remote Alarm Indication  
Inactive: Bit 11 of the frame = 0  
Active: Bit 11 of the frame = 1  
Four consecutive bad  
FAS  
Bit 11 = 1 for 4  
consecutive frames  
(6144 bits/179µs)  
Three consecutive good FAS  
Bit 11 = 0 for 4 consecutive  
frames (6144 bits/179µs)  
Note: LOS is not defined for unipolar (binary) operation.  
Register Name:  
T3E3INFO  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T3/E3 Information Register  
16h  
Bit #  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name  
Default  
SEFE  
EXZ  
MBE  
FBE  
ZSCD  
COFA  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
RAIC  
12  
AISC  
11  
LOFC  
10  
LOSC  
9
T3AIC  
8
E3Sn  
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write. The status bits in the T3E3INFO cannot cause a hardware  
interrupt to occur.  
Bit 0: Change Of Frame Alignment Detected (COFA). This latched read-only event-status bit will be set to a  
one when the T3/E3 framer has experienced a change of frame alignment (COFA). A COFA occurs when the  
device achieves synchronization in a different alignment than it had previously. If the device has never acquired  
synchronization before, then this status bit is meaningless. This bit will be cleared when read and will not be set  
again until the framer has lost synchronization and reacquired synchronization in a different alignment.  
Bit 1: Zero Suppression Codeword Detected (ZSCD). This latched read-only event-status bit will be set to a one  
when the T3/E3 framer has detected a B3ZS/HDB3 codeword. This bit will be cleared when read and will not be  
set again until the framer has detected another B3ZS/HDB3 codeword.  
Bit 2: F-Bit or FAS Error Detected (FBE). This latched read-only status bit will be set to a one when the DS3112  
has detected an error in either the F bits (T3 mode) or the FAS word (E3 mode). This bit will be cleared when read  
and will not be set again until the device detects another error.  
Bit 3: M-Bit Error Detected (MBE). This latched read-only event status bit will be set to a one when the DS3112  
has detected an error in the M bits. This bit will be cleared when read and will not be set again until the device  
detects another error in one of the M bits. This status bit has no meaning in the E3 mode and should be ignored.  
Bit 4: Excessive Zeros Detected (EXZ). This latched read-only event status bit will be set to a one each time the  
DS3112 has detected a consecutive string of either three or more zeros (T3 mode) or four or more zeros (E3 mode).  
This bit will be cleared when read and will not be set again until the device detects another EXcessive Zero event.  
57 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
Bit 5: Severely Errored Framing Event Detected (SEFE). This latched read-only event-status bit will be set to a  
one each time the DS3112 has detected either three or more F bits in error out of 16 consecutive F bits (T3 mode)  
or four bad FAS words in a row (E3 mode). This bit will be cleared when read and will not be set again until the  
device detects another SEFE event.  
Bit 8: E3 National Bit (E3Sn). This read-only real-time status bit reports the incoming E3 National Bit (Sn). It is  
loaded at the start of each E3 frame as the Sn bit is decoded. The host can use the RSOF status bit in the T3/E3  
Status Register (T3E3SR) to determine when to read this bit.  
Bit 9: T3 Application ID Channel Status (T3AIC). This read-only real-time status bit can be used to help  
determine whether an incoming T3 data stream is in C-Bit Parity mode or M23 mode. In C-Bit Parity mode, it is  
recommended that the first C bit in each M frame be set to one. In M23 mode, the first C bit in each M frame  
should be toggling between zero and one to indicate that the bits need to be stuffed or not. This bit will be set to a  
one when the device detects that the first C bit in the M frame is set to one for 1020 times or more out of 1024  
consecutive M frames (109ms). It will be allowed to be cleared when the device detects that the first C bit is set to  
one less than 1020 times out of 1024 consecutive M frames (109ms). This status bit has no meaning in the E3 mode  
and should be ignored.  
Bit 10: Loss Of Signal Clear Detected (LOSC). This latched read-only event-status bit will be set to a one each  
time the T3/E3 framer exits a Loss Of Signal (LOS) state. This bit will be cleared when read and will not be set  
again until the device once again exits the LOS state. The LOS alarm criteria are described in Table 5-1 and  
Table 5-2. This status bit is useful in helping the host determine if the LOS persists as defined in ANSI T1.231.  
Bit 11: Loss Of Frame Clear Detected (LOFC). This latched read-only event-status bit will be set to a one each  
time the T3/E3 framer exits a Loss Of Frame (LOF) state. This bit will be cleared when read and will not be set  
again until the device once again exits the LOF state. The LOF alarm criteria are described in Table 5-1 and  
Table 5-2. This status bit is useful in helping the host determine if the LOF persists as defined in ANSI T1.231.  
Bit 12: Alarm Indication Signal Clear Detected (AISC). This latched read-only event status bit will be set to a  
one each time the T3/E3 framer no longer detects the AIS alarm state. This bit will be cleared when read and will  
not be set again until the device once again exits the AIS alarm state. The AIS alarm criteria is described in  
Table 5-1 and Table 5-2. This status bit is useful in helping the host determine if the AIS persists as defined in  
ANSI T1.231.  
Bit 13: Remote Alarm Indication Clear Detected (RAIC). This latched read-only event-status bit will be set to a  
one each time the T3/E3 framer no longer detects the RAI alarm state. This bit will be cleared when read and will  
not be set again until the device once again exits the RAI alarm state. The RAI alarm criteria are described in  
Table 5-1 and Table 5-2. This status bit is useful in helping the host determine if the RAI persists as defined in  
ANSI T1.231.  
58 of 133  
DS3112  
5.6 T3/E3 Performance Error Counters  
There are six error counters in the DS3112. All of the errors counters are 16 bits in length. The host has  
three options as to how these errors counters are updated. The device can be configured to automatically  
update the counters once a second or manually via either an internal software bit (MECU) or an external  
signal (FRMECU). See Section 4.2 for details. All the error counters saturate when full and will not  
rollover.  
Register Name:  
BPVCR  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
BiPolar Violation Count Register  
20h  
Bit #  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name  
Default  
BPV7  
BPV6  
BPV5  
BPV4  
BPV3  
BPV2  
BPV1  
BPV0  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
BPV15  
14  
BPV14  
13  
BPV13  
12  
BPV12  
11  
BPV11  
10  
BPV10  
9
8
BPV9  
BPV8  
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 15: 16-Bit BiPolar Violation Counter (BPV0 to BPV15). These bits report the number of BiPolar  
Violations (BPV). In the E3 Mode, this counter can also be configured via the E3CVE bit in the T3E3 Control  
Register (Section 5.2) to count Code Violations (CV). A BPV is defined as consecutive pulses (or marks) of the  
same polarity that are not part of a B3ZS/HDB3 codeword. A CV is defined in ITU O.161 as consecutive BPVs of  
the same polarity.  
Register Name:  
EXZCR  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
EXcessive Zero Count Register  
22h  
Bit #  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name  
Default  
EXZ7  
EXZ6  
EXZ5  
EXZ4  
EXZ3  
EXZ2  
EXZ1  
EXZ0  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
EXZ15  
14  
EXZ14  
13  
EXZ13  
12  
EXZ12  
11  
EXZ11  
10  
EXZ10  
9
8
EXZ9  
EXZ8  
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 15: 16-Bit EXcessive Zero Counter (EXZ0 to EXZ15). These bits report the number of EXcessive Zero  
occurrences (EXZ). An EXZ occurrence is defined as three or more consecutive zeros in the T3 mode and four or  
more consecutive zeros in the E3 mode. As an example, a string of eight consecutive zeros would only increment  
this counter once.  
59 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Register Name:  
FECR  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
Frame Error Count Register  
24h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
FE7  
6
FE6  
5
FE5  
4
FE4  
3
FE3  
2
FE2  
1
FE1  
0
FE0  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
FE15  
14  
FE14  
13  
FE13  
12  
FE12  
11  
FE11  
10  
FE10  
9
FE9  
8
FE8  
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 15: 16-Bit Framing Bit Error Counter (FE0 to FE15). These bits report either the number of Loss Of  
Frame (LOF) occurrences or the number of framing bit errors received. The FECR is configured via the host by the  
Frame Error Counting Control Bits (FECC0 and FECC1) in the T3E3 Control Register (Section 5.2). The possible  
configurations are shown below.  
FRAME ERROR COUNT REGISTER (FECR)  
FECC1  
FECC0  
CONFIGURATION  
T3 Mode: Count Loss Of Frame (LOF) Occurrences  
E3 Mode: Count Loss Of Frame (LOF) Occurrences  
T3 Mode: Count both F Bit and M Bit Errors  
E3 Mode: Count Bit Errors in the FAS Word  
T3 Mode: Count Only F Bit Errors  
E3 Mode: Count Word Errors in the FAS Word  
T3 Mode: Count only M Bit Errors  
E3 Mode: Illegal State  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
When the FECR is configured to count LOF occurrences, the FECR increments by one each time the device loses  
receive synchronization. When the FECR is configured to count framing bit errors, it can be configured via the  
ECC control bit in the T3/E3 Control Register (Section 5.2) to either continue counting frame bit errors during a  
LOF or not.  
Register Name:  
PCR  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T3 Parity Bit Error Count Register  
26h  
Bit #  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name  
Default  
PE7  
PE6  
PE5  
PE4  
PE3  
PE2  
PE1  
PE0  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
PE15  
14  
PE14  
13  
PE13  
12  
PE12  
11  
PE11  
10  
PE10  
9
PE9  
8
PE8  
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 15:16-Bit T3 Parity Bit Error Counter (PE0 to PE15). These bits report the number of T3 parity bit  
errors. In the E3 mode, this counter is meaningless and should be ignored. A parity bit error is defined as an  
occurrence when the two parity bits do not match one another or when the two Parity Bits do not match the parity  
calculation made on the information bits. Via the ECC control bit in the T3/E3 Control Register (Section 5.2), the  
PCR can be configured to either continue counting parity bit errors during a LOF or not.  
60 of 133  
DS3112  
Register Name:  
CPCR  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T3 C-Bit Parity Bit Error Count Register  
28h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CPE0  
CPE7  
CPE6  
CPE5  
CPE4  
CPE3  
CPE2  
CPE1  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
CPE15  
14  
CPE14  
13  
CPE13  
12  
CPE12  
11  
CPE11  
10  
CPE10  
9
8
CPE9  
CPE8  
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 15: 16-Bit T3 C-Bit Parity Bit Error Counter (CPE0 to CPE15). These bits report the number of T3  
C-bit parity bit errors. When the device is not in the C-bit parity mode or when the device is in the E3 mode, this  
counter is meaningless and should be ignored. A C-bit parity bit error is defined as an occurrence when the  
majority decoded three CP parity bits do not match the parity calculation made on the information bits. Via the  
ECC control bit in the T3/E3 control register (Section 5.2), the CPCR can be configured to either continue counting  
C-bit parity bit errors during a LOF or not.  
Register Name:  
FEBECR  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T3 Far End Block Error or E3 RAI Count Register  
2Ah  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
FEBE7  
6
FEBE6  
5
FEBE5  
4
FEBE4  
3
FEBE3  
2
FEBE2  
1
FEBE1  
0
FEBE0  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
FEBE15  
14  
FEBE14  
13  
FEBE13  
12  
FEBE12  
11  
FEBE11  
10  
FEBE10  
9
FEBE9  
8
FEBE8  
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 15: 16-Bit T3 Far End Block Error or E3 RAI Counter (FEBE0 to FEBE15). In the T3 C-bit parity  
mode, these bits report the number of T3 Far End Block Errors (FEBE). This counter increments each time the  
three FEBE bits do not equal 111. In the E3 Mode, these bits report the number of times the RAI bit is received in  
the “disturbed state” (i.e., the number of times that it is set to a one). In the T3 mode, when the device is not in the  
C-bit parity mode, this counter is meaningless and should be ignored. Via the ECC control bit in the T3/E3 control  
register (Section 5.2), the FEBECR can be configured to either continue counting FEBEs or active RAI bits during  
a LOF or not.  
61 of 133  
DS3112  
6 M13/E13/G.747 MULTIPLEXER AND T2/E2/G.747 FRAME  
Note that if the DS3112 is used as a stand-alone T3/E3 framer and the multiplexer functionality is  
disabled, then the registers and functionality described in this section are not applicable and should be  
ignored by the host.  
On the receive side, the T2/E2/G.747 framer locates the frame boundaries of the incoming T2/E2/G.747  
data stream and monitors the data stream for alarms and errors. Alarms are detected and reported in  
T2/E2 Status Registers (T2E2SR1 and T2E2SR2), which are described in Section 6.3. The host can force  
the T2/E2/G.747 framer to resynchronize via the T2E2RSY control bit in the MRID register (Section  
4.1). On the transmit side, the device formats the outgoing data stream with the proper framing pattern  
and overhead and can generate alarms. It can also inject errors for diagnostic testing purposes. The  
transmit side of the framer is called the “formatter.”  
6.1 T1/E1 AIS Generation  
The DS3112 can generate an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) for the T1 and E1 data streams in both the  
transmit and receive directions. AIS for T1 and E1 signals is defined as an unframed all ones pattern. On  
reset, the DS3112 will force AIS in both the transmit and receive directions on all 28 T1 and 16/21 E1  
data streams. It is the host’s task to configure the device to pass normal traffic via the T1E1RAIS1,  
T1E1RAIS2, T1E1TAIS1, and T1E1TAIS2 registers (Section 6.4).  
6.2 T2/E2/G.747 Framer Control Register Description  
Register Name:  
T2E2CR1  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T2/E2 Control Register 1  
30h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
6
TRAI7  
0
5
TRAI6  
0
4
TRAI5  
0
3
TRAI4  
0
2
TRAI3  
0
1
TRAI2  
0
0
TRAI1  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
TAIS7  
0
13  
TAIS6  
0
12  
TAIS5  
0
11  
TAIS4  
0
10  
TAIS3  
0
9
TAIS2  
0
8
TAIS1  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 6: T2/E2/G.747 Transmit Remote Alarm Indication (TRAIn where n = 1 to 7). When this bit is set  
high in the T3 mode, the X bit will be set to zero. When this bit is set high in the E3 mode, the RAI bit (bit number  
11 of each E2 frame) will be set to a one. In the E3 mode, TRAI5 to TRAI7 (bits 4 to 6) are disabled and should be  
set low by the host. When this bit is set high in the G.747 mode, the RAI bit (bit number 1 of Set 2 in each G.747  
frame) will be set to a one. When this bit it set low in the T3 mode, the X bit will be set to a one. When this bit is  
set low in the E3 and G.747 modes, the RAI bit will be set to zero.  
0 = do not transmit RAI  
1 = transmit RAI  
Bits 8 to 14:T2/E2/G.747 Transmit Alarm Indication Signal (TAISn where n = 1 to 7). When this bit is set  
high, the transmit formatter will generate an unframed all ones pattern. When this bit it set low, normal data is  
transmitted. In the E3 mode, TAIS5 to TAIS7 (bits 4 to 6) are disabled and should be set low by the host.  
0 = do not transmit AIS  
1 = transmit AIS  
62 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Register Name:  
T2E2CR2  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T2/E2 Control Register 2  
32h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
6
LOFG7  
0
5
LOFG6  
0
4
LOFG5  
0
3
LOFG4  
0
2
LOFG3  
0
1
LOFG2  
0
0
LOFG1  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
E2Sn4  
10  
E2Sn3  
9
8
E2Sn2  
E2Sn1  
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 6: T2/E2/G.747 Transmit Loss Of Frame Generation (LOFGn where n = 1 to 7). A zero to one  
transition on this bit will cause the T2/E2/G.747 transmit formatter to generate enough framing bit errors to cause  
the far end to lose frame synchronization. This bit must be cleared and set again for a subsequent set of errors to be  
generated.  
MODE  
FRAMING ERRORS GENERATED  
T3 Mode  
Four consecutive F bit errors  
Four consecutive FAS words of 0000101111 generated instead of the normal FAS word,  
which is 1111010000 (i.e., all FAS bits are inverted)  
E3 Mode  
Four consecutive FAS words of 000101111 generated instead of the normal FAS word,  
which is 111010000 (i.e., all FAS bits are inverted)  
G.747 Mode  
Bits 8 to 11: E2 Transmit National Bit Setting (E2Snn where n = 1 to 4). These bits are ignored in the T3 and  
G.747 modes. The received Sn can be read from the T2E2 Status Register 2.  
0 = force the Sn bit to zero  
1 = force the Sn bit to one  
63 of 133  
DS3112  
6.3 T2/E2/G.747 Framer Status and Interrupt Register Description  
Register Name:  
T2E2SR1  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T2/E2 Status Register 1  
34h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
IELOF  
0
6
LOF7  
-
5
LOF6  
-
4
LOF5  
-
3
LOF4  
-
2
LOF3  
-
1
LOF2  
-
0
LOF1  
-
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
IEAIS  
0
14  
AIS7  
-
13  
AIS6  
-
12  
AIS5  
-
11  
AIS4  
-
10  
AIS3  
-
9
AIS2  
-
8
AIS1  
-
Note: See Figure 6-1 for details on the signal flow for the status bits in the T2E2SR1 register. Bits that are underlined are read-only; all  
other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 6: Loss Of Frame Occurrence (LOFn when n = 1 to 7). This latched read-only alarm-status bit will be  
set to a one each time the corresponding T2/E2/G.747 framer detects a Loss Of Frame (LOF). This bit will be  
cleared when read unless a LOF condition still exists in that T2/E2/G.747 framer. A change in state of the LOF in  
one or more of the T2/E2/G.747 framers can cause the T2E2SR1 status bit (in the MSR register) to be set and a  
hardware interrupt to occur if the IELOF bit is set to a one and the T2E2SR1 bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR  
(IMSR) register is set to a one (Figure 6-1). The interrupt will be allowed to clear when this bit is read. The LOF  
alarm criteria are described in Table 6-1, Table 6-2, and Table 6-3. In the E3 mode, LOF5 to LOF7 (bits 4 to 6) are  
meaningless and should be ignored.  
Bit 7: Interrupt Enable for Loss of Frame Occurrence (IELOF). This bit should be set to one if the host wishes  
to have T2/E2/G.747 LOF occurrences cause a hardware interrupt or the setting of the T2E2SR1 status bit in the  
MSR register (Figure 6-1). The T2E2SR1 bit in the Interrupt Mask for the Master Status Register (IMSR) must  
also be set to one for an interrupt to occur.  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bits 8 to 14: Alarm Indication Signal Detected (AISn when n = 1 to 7). This latched read-only alarm-status bit  
will be set to a one each time the corresponding T2/E2/G.747 framer detects an incoming AIS alarm. This bit will  
be cleared when read unless the AIS alarm still exists in that T2/E2/G.747 framer. A change in state of the AIS  
detector in one or more of the T2/E2/G.747 framers can cause the T2E2SR1 status bit (in the MSR register) to be  
set and a hardware interrupt to occur if the IEAIS bit is set to a one and the T2E2SR1 bit in the Interrupt Mask for  
MSR (IMSR) register is set to a one (Figure 6-1). The interrupt will be allowed to clear when this bit is read. The  
AIS alarm criteria is described in Table 6-1, Table 6-2, and Table 6-3. In the E3 mode, AIS5 to AIS7 (bits 4 to 6)  
are meaningless and should be ignored.  
Bit 15: Interrupt Enable for Alarm Indication Signal (IEAIS). This bit should be set to one if the host wishes to  
have T2/E2/G.747 AIS detection occurrences cause a hardware interrupt or the setting of the T2E2SR1 status bit in  
the MSR register (Figure 6-1). The T2E2SR1 bit in the Interrupt Mask for the Master Status Register (IMSR) must  
also be set to one for an interrupt to occur.  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
64 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Figure 6-1. T2E2SR1 Status Bit Flow  
Internal LOF  
Signal from  
T2/E2 Framer 1  
LOF1  
(T2E2SR1  
Bit 0)  
Alarm Latch  
Event  
Latch  
Change in State Detect  
Internal LOF  
Signal from  
T2/E2 Framer 2  
LOF2  
(T2E2SR1  
Bit 1)  
Alarm Latch  
Event  
Latch  
Change in State Detect  
OR  
Mask  
IELOF  
(T2E2SR1  
Bit 7)  
Internal LOF  
Signal from  
T2 Framer 7  
LOF7  
(T2E2SR1  
Bit 6)  
Alarm Latch  
Event  
Latch  
Change in State Detect  
T2E2SR1  
Status Bit  
(MSR Bit 5)  
OR  
INT*  
Hardware  
Signal  
Mask  
Internal AIS  
AIS1  
Signal from  
T2/E2 Framer 1  
(T2E2SR1  
Bit 8)  
Alarm Latch  
T2E2SR1  
(IMSR Bit 5)  
Event  
Latch  
Change in State Detect  
Internal AIS  
AIS2  
(T2E2SR1  
Bit 9)  
Signal from  
T2/E2 Framer 2  
Alarm Latch  
Event  
Latch  
Change in State Detect  
OR  
Mask  
IEAIS  
(T2E2SR1  
Bit 15)  
Internal AIS  
Signal from  
T2 Framer 7  
AIS7  
(T2E2SR1  
Bit 14)  
Alarm Latch  
Event  
Latch  
Change in State Detect  
NOTE: ALL EVENT AND ALARM LATCHES ABOVE ARE CLEARED WHEN THE T2E2SR1 REGISTER IS READ.  
65 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Register Name:  
T2E2SR2  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T2/E2 Status Register 2  
36h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
IERAI  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RAI1  
RAI7  
RAI6  
RAI5  
RAI4  
RAI3  
RAI2  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
E2SOF4  
14  
E2SOF3  
13  
E2SOF2  
12  
E2SOF1  
11  
E2Sn4  
10  
E2Sn3  
9
8
E2Sn2  
E2Sn1  
Note: See Figure 6-2 for details on the signal flow for the status bits in the T2E2SR2 register. Bits that are underlined are read-only; all  
other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 6: Remote Alarm Indication Signal Detected (RAIn when n = 1 to 7). This latched read-only alarm-  
status bit will be set to a one each time the corresponding T2/E2/G.747 framer detects an incoming RAI alarm.  
This bit will be cleared when read unless the RAI alarm still exists in that T2/E2/G.747 framer. A change in state of  
the RAI in one or more of the T2/E2/G.747 framers can cause the T2E2SR2 status bit (in the MSR register) to be  
set and a hardware interrupt to occur if the IERAI bit is set to a one and the T2E2SR2 bit in the Interrupt Mask for  
MSR (IMSR) register is set to a one (Figure 6-2). The interrupt will be allowed to clear when this bit is read. The  
RAI alarm criteria are described in Table 6-1, Table 6-2, and Table 6-3. In the E3 mode, RAI5 to RAI7 (bits 4 to 6)  
are meaningless and should be ignored.  
Bit 7: Interrupt Enable for Remote Alarm Indication Signal (IERAI). This bit should be set to one if the host  
wishes to have RAI detection occurrences cause a hardware interrupt or the setting of the T2E2SR2 status bit in the  
MSR register (Figure 6-2). The T2E2SR2 bit in the Interrupt Mask for the Master Status Register (IMSR) must  
also be set to one for an interrupt to occur.  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bits 8 to 11: E2 Receive National Bit (E2Snn when n = 1 to 4). This read-only real-time status bit reports the  
incoming E2 National Bit (Sn). It is loaded at the start of each E2 frame as the Sn bit is decoded. The host can use  
the E2SOF status bit to determine when to read this bit. In the T3 and G.747 modes, this bit is meaningless and  
should be ignored. This bit cannot cause an interrupt to occur.  
Bits 12 to 15: E2 Receive Start Of Frame (E2SOFn where n = 1 to 4). This latched read-only event-status bit  
will be set to a one on each E2 receive frame boundary. This bit will be cleared when read. The setting of this  
status bit cannot cause an interrupt to occur.  
Figure 6-2. T2E2SR2 Status Bit Flow  
Internal RAI  
Signal from  
T2/E2 Framer 1  
RAI1  
(T2E2SR2  
Bit 0)  
Alarm Latch  
Change in State Detect  
Event Latch  
Internal RAI  
Signal from  
T2/E2 Framer 2  
RAI2  
(T2E2SR2  
Bit 1)  
Alarm Latch  
Change in State Detect  
Event Latch  
T2E2SR2  
Status Bit  
(MSR Bit 6)  
OR  
Mask  
INT*  
Hardware  
Signal  
Mask  
IERAI  
(T2E2SR2  
Bit 7)  
Internal RAI  
Signal from  
T2 Framer 7  
RAI7  
(T2E2SR2  
Bit 6)  
Alarm Latch  
T2E2SR2  
(IMSR Bit 6)  
Change in State Detect  
Event Latch  
NOTE: ALL EVENT AND ALARM LATCHES ABOVE ARE CLEARED WHEN THE T2E2SR2 REGISTER IS READ.  
66 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
Table 6-1. T2 Alarm Criteria  
ALARM/  
DEFINITION  
CONDITION  
SET CRITERIA  
CLEAR CRITERIA  
Alarm Indication Signal  
Unframed all ones  
Eight or fewer zeros in four  
consecutive M frames (4704  
bits)  
Two or more F bits in error  
out of five, or two or more M  
bits in error out of four  
Nine or more zeros in four  
consecutive M frames  
(4704 bits)  
AIS  
LOF  
RAI  
Loss Of Frame  
Too many F bits or M bits in  
error  
Remote Alarm Indication  
Inactive: X = 1  
Synchronization occurs  
X = 0 for four consecutive M X = 1 for four consecutive  
frames (4704 bits)  
M frames (4704 bits)  
Active: X = 0  
Table 6-2. E2 Alarm Criteria  
ALARM/  
DEFINITION  
CONDITION  
SET CRITERIA  
CLEAR CRITERIA  
Alarm Indication Signal  
Four or fewer zeros in each of Five or more zeros in each  
AIS  
LOF  
RAI  
Unframed all ones  
two consecutive 848-bit  
frames  
Four consecutive bad FAS  
of two consecutive 848-bit  
frames  
Three consecutive good  
FAS  
Loss Of Frame  
Too many FAS errors  
Remote Alarm Indication  
Inactive: Bit 11 of the frame = 0 frames (3392 bits)  
Active: Bit 11 of the frame = 1  
Bit 11 = 1 for four consecutive Bit 11 = 0 for four  
consecutive frames (3392  
bits)  
Table 6-3. G.747 Alarm Criteria  
ALARM/  
DEFINITION  
CONDITION  
SET CRITERIA  
CLEAR CRITERIA  
Alarm Indication Signal  
Four or fewer zeros in each of Five or more zeros in each  
AIS  
LOF  
RAI  
Unframed all ones  
two consecutive 840-bit  
frames  
Four consecutive bad FAS  
of two consecutive 840-bit  
frames  
Three consecutive good  
FAS  
Bit 1 of Set 2 = 0 for four  
consecutive frames (3360  
bits)  
Loss Of Frame  
Too many FAS errors  
Remote Alarm Indication  
Inactive: Bit 1 of Set 2 = 0  
Active: Bit 1 of Set 2 = 1  
Bit 1 of Set 2 = 1 for four  
consecutive frames (3360  
bits)  
67 of 133  
 
DS3112  
6.4 T1/E1 AIS Generation Control Register Description  
Via the T1/E1 Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Control Registers, the host can configure the DS3112 to  
generate an unframed all ones signal in either the transmit or receive paths on the 28 T1 ports or the 16/21  
E1 ports. On reset, the device will force AIS in both the transmit and receive paths and it is up to the host  
to modify the T1/E1 AIS Generation Control Registers to allow normal T1/E1 traffic to traverse the  
DS3112. See the block diagrams in Section 1 for details on where the AIS signal is injected into the data  
flow. When the M13/E13 multiplexer function is disabled in the DS3112 (see the UNCHEN control bit in  
the Master Control Register 1 in Section 4.2 for details), the T1/E1 AIS Generation Control Registers are  
meaningless and can be set to any value.  
Register Name:  
T1E1RAIS1  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T1/E1 Receive Path AIS Generation Control Register 1  
40h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
AIS8  
0
6
AIS7  
0
5
AIS6  
0
4
AIS5  
0
3
AIS4  
0
2
AIS3  
0
1
AIS2  
0
0
AIS1  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
AIS16  
0
14  
AIS15  
0
13  
AIS14  
0
12  
AIS13  
0
11  
AIS12  
0
10  
AIS11  
0
9
AIS10  
0
8
AIS9  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 15: Receive AIS Generation Control for T1/E1 Ports 1 to 16 (AIS1 to AIS2). These bits determine  
whether the device will replace the demultiplexed T1/E1 data stream with an unframed all ones AIS signal. AIS1  
controls the data at LRDAT1, AIS2 controls the data at LRDAT2, and so on. Since ports 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, and  
28 are not active in the G.747 mode, the AIS4, AIS8, AIS12, and AIS16 bits have no affect in the G.747 mode.  
0 = send AIS to the LRDAT output  
1 = send normal data to the LRDAT output  
Register Name:  
T1E1RAIS2  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T1/E1 Receive Path AIS Generation Control Register 2  
42h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
AIS24  
0
6
AIS23  
0
5
AIS22  
0
4
AIS21  
0
3
AIS20  
0
2
AIS19  
0
1
AIS18  
0
0
AIS17  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
AIS28  
0
10  
AIS27  
0
9
AIS26  
0
8
AIS25  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 11:Receive AIS Generation Control for T1 Ports 17 to 28 (AIS17 to AIS28). These bits determine  
whether the device will replace the demultiplexed T1/E1 data stream with an unframed all ones AIS signal. AIS17  
controls the data at LRDAT17, AIS18 controls the data at LRDAT18, and so on. Since ports 17 to 28 are not active  
in the E3 mode, these bits have no effect in the E3 mode. Since ports 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, and 28 are not active in  
the G.747 mode, the AIS20, AIS24 and AIS28 bits have no affect in the G.747 Mode.  
0 = send AIS to the LRDAT output  
1 = send normal data to the LRDAT output  
68 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Register Name:  
T1E1TAIS1  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T1/E1 Transmit Path AIS Generation Control Register 1  
44h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
AIS8  
0
6
AIS7  
0
5
AIS6  
0
4
AIS5  
0
3
AIS4  
0
2
AIS3  
0
1
AIS2  
0
0
AIS1  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
AIS16  
0
14  
AIS15  
0
13  
AIS14  
0
12  
AIS13  
0
11  
AIS12  
0
10  
AIS11  
0
9
AIS10  
0
8
AIS9  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 15: Transmit AIS Generation Control for T1/E1 Ports 1 to 16 (AIS1 to AIS2). These bits determine  
whether the device will replace the data input from the 28 T1 data streams or 16/21 E1 data streams with an  
unframed all ones AIS signal. AIS1 controls the data from LTDAT1, AIS2 controls the data from LTDAT2, and so  
on. Since ports 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, and 28 are not active in the G.747 Mode, the AIS4, AIS8, AIS12, and AIS16  
bits have no affect in the G.747 mode.  
0 = replace data from LTDAT with AIS  
1 = allow normal data from LTDAT to flow through to the multiplexer  
Register Name:  
T1E1TAIS2  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T1/E1 Transmit Path AIS Generation Control Register 2  
46h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
AIS24  
0
6
AIS23  
0
5
AIS22  
0
4
AIS21  
0
3
AIS20  
0
2
AIS19  
0
1
AIS18  
0
0
AIS17  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
AIS28  
0
10  
AIS27  
0
9
AIS26  
0
8
AIS25  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 11: Transmit AIS Generation Control for T1 Ports 17 to 28 (AIS17 to AIS28). These bits determine  
whether the device will replace the data input from the 28 T1 data streams or 16/21 E1 data streams with an  
unframed all ones AIS signal. AIS17 controls the data from LTDAT17, AIS18 controls the data from LTDAT18,  
and so on. Since ports 17 to 28 are not active in the E3 mode, these bits have no affect in the E3 mode. Since ports  
22 to 28 are not active in the G.747 mode, these bits have no affect in the G.747 mode. Since ports 4, 8, 12, 16, 20,  
24, and 28 are not active in the G.747 mode, the AIS20, AIS24, and AIS28 bits have no effect in the G.747 mode.  
0 = replace data from LTDAT with AIS  
1 = allow normal data from LTDAT to flow through to the multiplexer  
69 of 133  
DS3112  
7 T1/E1 LOOPBACK AND DROP AND INSERT FUNCTIONALITY  
On the T1 and E1 ports, the DS3112 has loopback capability in both directions. There is a per-port line  
loopback that loops the receive side back to the transmit side and a per-port diagnostic loopback that  
loops the transmit side back to the receive side. In addition, the device can detect the T1 line loopback  
command as well as generate it. Also, the DS3112 has two drop and insert ports that allow any two of the  
28 T1 or 16/21 E1 data streams to be dropped or inserted from two auxiliary ports. All these functions are  
described below.  
7.1 T1/E1 Line Loopback  
Each of the 28 T1 or 16/21 E1 receive demultiplexed ports can be looped back to the transmit side. This  
loopback is called a line loopback and is shown in the block diagrams in Section 1. When the line  
loopback is invoked, the normal transmit data input at the LTCLK and LTDAT inputs is ignored and  
replaced with the data from the associated receive port. The host invokes the line loopback via the  
T1E1LLB1 and T1E1LLB2 control registers (Section 7.5).  
7.2 T1/E1 Diagnostic Loopback  
Each of the 28 T1 or 16/21 E1 transmit multiplexed ports can be looped back to the receive side. This  
loopback is called a diagnostic loopback and is shown in the block diagrams in Section 1. When the  
diagnostic loopback is invoked, the normal receive data output at the LRCLK and LRDAT outputs is  
replaced with the data from the associated transmit port. The host invokes the diagnostic loopback via the  
T1E1DLB1 and T1E1DLB2 control registers (Section 7.5).  
7.3 T1 Line Loopback Command  
M13 systems have the ability to request that a T1 line be looped back, which is achieved by inverting the  
C3 bit. See Section 14.2 for details on M13 formats and operation. The DS3112 will detect when the C3  
bit has been inverted and will indicate which T1 line is being requested to be placed into line loopback  
via the T1LBSR1 and T1LBSR2 registers (Section 7.6). When the host detects that a T1 line is being  
requested to be placed into loopback, it should set the appropriate control bit in either the T1E1LLB1 or  
T1E1LLB2 register. The DS3112 can also generate a T1 line loopback command by inverting the C3 bit,  
which is accomplished via the T1LBCR1 and L1LBCR2 registers (Section 7.5). Note that when E3 or  
G.747 mode is enabled, the T1 line loopback command functionality is not applicable.  
7.4 T1/E1 Drop and Insert  
The DS3112 has the ability to drop any of the 28 T1 or 16/21 E1 receive channels to either one of two  
drop ports. Drop Port A and Drop Port B consist of the outputs LRCLKA/LRDATA and  
LRCLKB/LRDATB, respectively. See the block diagrams in Section 1 for more details. The host can  
determine which T1/E1 port should be dropped via the T1E1SDP control register (Section 7.7). When a  
T1/E1 channel is dropped to either Drop Port A or B, the demultiplexed data is still output at the normal  
LRCLK and LRDAT outputs. On the transmit side, there are a complimentary pair of Insert Ports that are  
controlled via the T1E1SIP control register (Section 7.7). When enabled, the inserted port data and clock  
(LTDATA/LTDATB and LTCLKA/LTCLKB, respectively) replace the data that would normally be  
multiplexed in at LTDAT and LTCLK inputs.  
70 of 133  
 
DS3112  
7.5 T1/E1 Loopback Control Register Description  
Register Name:  
T1E1LLB1  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T1/E1 Line Loopback Control Register 1  
50h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
LLB8  
0
6
LLB7  
0
5
LLB6  
0
4
LLB5  
0
3
LLB4  
0
2
LLB3  
0
1
LLB2  
0
0
LLB1  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
LLB16  
0
14  
LLB15  
0
13  
LLB14  
0
12  
LLB13  
0
11  
LLB12  
0
10  
LLB11  
0
9
LLB10  
0
8
LLB9  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 15: T1/E1 Line Loopback Enable for Ports 1 to 16 (LLB1 to LLB16). These bits enable or disable the  
T1/E1 Line Loopback (LLB). See the Block Diagrams in Section 1 for a visual description of this loopback. LLB1  
corresponds to T1/E1 Port 1, LLB2 corresponds to T1/E1 Port 2, and so on. Since ports 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, and 28  
are not active in the G.747 mode, the LLB4, LLB8, LLB12, and LLB16 bits have no effect in the G.747 mode.  
0 = disable loopback  
1 = enable loopback  
Register Name:  
T1E1LLB2  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T1/E1 Line Loopback Control Register 2  
52h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
LLB24  
0
6
LLB23  
0
5
LLB22  
0
4
LLB21  
0
3
LLB20  
0
2
LLB19  
0
1
LLB18  
0
0
LLB17  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
LLB28  
0
10  
LLB27  
0
9
LLB26  
0
8
LLB25  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 11: T1 Line Loopback Enable for Ports 17 to 28 (LLB17 to LLB28). These bits enable or disable the  
T1 Line Loopback (LLB). See the block diagrams in Section 1 for a visual description of this loopback. LLB1  
corresponds to T17 Port 17, LLB18 corresponds to T1 Port 18, and so on. Since ports 17 to 28 are not active in the  
E3 mode, these bits have no effect in the E3 mode. Since ports 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, and 28 are not active in the  
G.747 mode, the LLB20, LLB24, and LLB28 bits have no effect in the G.747 mode.  
0 = disable loopback  
1 = enable loopback  
71 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Register Name:  
T1E1DLB1  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T1/E1 Diagnostic Loopback Control Register 1  
54h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
DLB8  
0
6
DLB7  
0
5
DLB6  
0
4
DLB5  
0
3
DLB4  
0
2
DLB3  
0
1
DLB2  
0
0
DLB1  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
DLB16  
0
14  
DLB15  
0
13  
DLB14  
0
12  
DLB13  
0
11  
DLB12  
0
10  
DLB11  
0
9
DLB10  
0
8
DLB9  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 15: T1/E1 Diagnostic Loopback Enable for Ports 1 to 16 (DLB1 to DLB16). These bits enable or  
disable the T1/E1 Diagnostic Loopback (DLB). See the block diagrams in Section 1 for a visual description of this  
loopback. DLB1 corresponds to T1/E1 Port 1, DLB2 corresponds to T1/E1 Port 2, and so on. If the device is  
configured in Low-Speed T1/E1 Port Loop Timed mode (if LLTM bit in the MC1 register is set to a one) then only  
data will be looped back—the clock will not be looped back. Since ports 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, and 28 are not active  
in the G.747 mode, the DLB4, DLB8, DLB12, and DLB16 bits have no effect in the G.747 mode.  
0 = disable loopback  
1 = enable loopback  
Register Name:  
T1E1DLB2  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T1/E1 Diagnostic Loopback Control Register 2  
56h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
DLB24  
0
6
DLB23  
0
5
DLB22  
0
4
DLB21  
0
3
DLB20  
0
2
DLB19  
0
1
DLB18  
0
0
DLB17  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
DLB28  
0
10  
DLB27  
0
9
DLB26  
0
8
DLB25  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 17 to 28: T1 Diagnostic Loopback Enable for Ports 17 to 28 (DLB17 to DLB28). These bits enable or  
disable the T1 Diagnostic Loopback (DLB). See the block diagrams in Section 1 for a visual description of this  
loopback. DLB1 corresponds to T17 Port 17, DLB18 corresponds to T1 Port 18, and so on. Since ports 17 to 28 are  
not active in the E3 mode, these bits have no effect in the E3 mode. Since ports 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, and 28 are not  
active in the G.747 Mode, the DLB20, DLB24 and DLB28 bits have no affect in the G.747 mode. If the device is  
configured in Low-Speed T1/E1 Port Loop Timed mode (if LLTM bit in the MC1 register is set to a one), then  
only data will be looped back, the clock will not be looped back.  
0 = disable loopback  
1 = enable loopback  
72 of 133  
DS3112  
Register Name:  
T1LBCR1  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T1 Line Loopback Command Register 1  
58h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
LB8  
0
6
LB7  
0
5
LB6  
0
4
LB5  
0
3
LB4  
0
2
LB3  
0
1
LB2  
0
0
LB1  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
LB16  
0
14  
LB15  
0
13  
LB14  
0
12  
LB13  
0
11  
LB12  
0
10  
LB11  
0
9
LB10  
0
8
LB9  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 15: T1 Line Loopback Far End Activate Command for Ports 1 to 16 (LB1 to LB16). These bits cause  
the appropriate T2 transmit formatter to generate a Line Loopback command for the far end. When this bit is set  
high, the T2 transmit formatter will force the C3 bit to be the inverse of the C1 and C2 bits. The T2 transmit  
formatter will continue to force the C3 bit to be the inverse of the C1 and C2 bits as long as this bit is held high.  
When this bit is set low, C3 will match the C1 and C2 bits. LB1 corresponds to T1/E1 Port 1, LB2 corresponds to  
T1/E1 Port 2, and so on. These bits are meaningless in the E3 and G.747 modes and should be set to 0.  
0 = do not generate the line loopback command by inverting the C3 bit  
1 = generate the line loopback command by inverting the C3 bit  
73 of 133  
DS3112  
Register Name:  
T1LBCR2  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T1 Line Loopback Command Register 2  
5Ah  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
LB24  
0
6
LB23  
0
5
LB22  
0
4
LB21  
0
3
LB20  
0
2
LB19  
0
1
LB18  
0
0
LB17  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
LB28  
0
10  
LB27  
0
9
LB26  
0
8
LB25  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 17 to 28: T1 Line Loopback Far End Activate Command for Ports 17 to 28 (LB17 to LB28). These bits  
cause the appropriate T2 transmit formatter to generate a Line Loopback command for the far end. When this bit is  
set high, the T2 transmit formatter will force the C3 bit to be the inverse of the C1 and C2 bits. The T2 transmit  
formatter will continue to force the C3 bit to be the inverse of the C1 and C2 bits as long as this bit is held high.  
When this bit is set low, C3 will match the C1 and C2 bits. LB17 corresponds to T1/E1 Port 17, L18 corresponds to  
T1/E1 Port 18, and so on. These bits are meaningless in the E3 and G.747 modes and should be set to 0.  
0 = do not generate the line loopback command by inverting the C3 bit  
1 = generate the line loopback command by inverting the C3 bit  
74 of 133  
DS3112  
7.6 T1 Line Loopback Command Status Register Description  
Register Name:  
T1LBSR1  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T1 Line Loopback Command Status Register 1  
5Ch  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LLB1  
LLB8  
LLB7  
LLB6  
LLB5  
LLB4  
LLB3  
LLB2  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
LLB16  
14  
LLB15  
13  
LLB14  
12  
LLB13  
11  
LLB12  
10  
LLB11  
9
LLB10  
8
LLB9  
Note: See Figure 7-1 for details on the signal flow for the status bits in the T1LBSR1 and T1LBSR2 registers. Bits that are underlined are  
read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 15: T1 Line Loopback Command Status for Ports 1 to 16 (LLB1 to LLB16). These read-only real-  
time status bits will be set to a one when the corresponding T2 framer detects that the C3 bit is the inverse of the  
C1 and C2 bits for 5 consecutive frames. These bits will be allowed to clear when the C3 bit is not the inverse of  
the C1 and C2 bits for five consecutive frames. LLB1 corresponds to T1/E1 Port 1, LLB2 corresponds to T1/E1  
Port 2, and so on. The setting of any of the bits in T1LBSR1 or T1LBSR2 can cause a hardware interrupt to occur  
if the T1LB bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) is set to a one. In the E3 and G.747 modes, these bits are  
meaningless and should be ignored.  
Register Name:  
T1LBSR2  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T1 Line Loopback Command Status Register 2  
5Eh  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
LLB24  
6
LLB23  
5
LLB22  
4
LLB21  
3
LLB20  
2
LLB19  
1
LLB18  
0
LLB17  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
LLB28  
10  
LLB27  
9
LLB26  
8
LLB25  
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 11: T1 Line Loopback Command Status for Ports 17 to 28 (LLB17 to LLB28). These read-only real-  
time status bits will be set to a one when the corresponding T2 framer detects that the C3 bit is the inverse of the  
C1 and C2 bits for 5 consecutive frames. These bits will be allowed to clear when the C3 bit is not the inverse of  
the C1 and C2 bits for five consecutive frames. LLB17 corresponds to T1/E1 Port 17, LLB18 corresponds to T1/E1  
Port 18, and so on. The setting of any of the bits in T1LBSR1 or T1LBSR2 can cause a hardware interrupt to occur  
if the T1LB bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) is set to a one. In the E3 and G.747 Modes, these bits are  
meaningless and should be ignored.  
75 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Figure 7-1. T1LBSR1 and T1LBSR2 Status Bit Flow  
LLB1  
(T1LBSR1  
Bit 0)  
Internal T1  
Loopback Command  
Signal from  
T2/E2 Framer  
LLB2  
(T1LBSR1  
Bit 1)  
Internal T1  
Loopback Command  
Signal from  
T2/E2 Framer  
T1LB  
Status Bit  
(MSR Bit 8)  
OR  
INT*  
Hardware  
Signal  
Mask  
LLB28  
(T1LBSR2  
Bit 11)  
Internal T1  
Loopback Command  
Signal from  
T1LB  
(IMSR Bit 8)  
T2/E2 Framer  
7.7 T1/E1 Drop and Insert Control Register Description  
Register Name:  
T1E1SDP  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T1/E1 Select Register for Receive Drop Ports A and B  
60h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
6
5
4
DPAS4  
0
3
DPAS3  
0
2
DPAS2  
0
1
0
DPAS0  
DPAS1  
0
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
12  
DPBS4  
0
11  
DPBS3  
0
10  
DPBS2  
0
9
DPBS1  
0
8
DPBS0  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 4: T1/E1 Drop Port A Select Bits (DPAS0 to DPAS4).  
Bits 8 to 12: T1/E1 Drop Port B Select Bits (DPBS0 to DPBS4).  
These bits select which of the 28 T1 ports or 16 E1 ports (if any) should be output at either Drop Port A or Drop  
Port B. If no port is selected, the LRDATA, LRCLKA, LRDATB, and LRCLKB output pins will be forced low.  
DPxS4:0  
00000 No Port  
00001 Port 1  
00010 Port 2  
00011 Port 3  
00100 Port 4  
00101 Port 5  
00110 Port 6  
00111 Port 7  
01000 Port 8  
01001 Port 9  
01010 Port 10  
01011 Port 11  
01100 Port 12  
01101 Port 13  
01110 Port 14  
01111 Port 15  
10000 Port 16  
10001 Port 17  
10010 Port 18  
10011 Port 19  
10100 Port 20  
10101 Port 21  
10110 Port 22  
10111 Port 23  
11000 Port 24  
11001 Port 25  
11010 Port 26  
11011 Port 27  
11100 Port 28  
11101 No Port  
11110 No Port  
11111 No Port  
76 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Register Name:  
T1E1SIP  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
T1/E1 Select Register for Transmit Insert Ports A and B  
62h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
6
5
4
IPAS4  
0
3
IPAS3  
0
2
IPAS2  
0
1
IPAS1  
0
0
IPAS0  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
12  
IPBS4  
0
11  
IPBS3  
0
10  
IPBS2  
0
9
IPBS1  
0
8
IPBS0  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 4: T1/E1 Insert Port A Select Bits (IPAS0 to IPAS4).  
Bits 8 to 12: T1/E1 Insert Port B Select Bits (IPBS0 to IPBS4).  
These bits select if clock and data from either of the two insert ports (Insert Port A or Insert Port B) should replace  
the clock and data presented at one of the 28 T1 ports or 16/21 E1 ports. If no port is selected, the clock and data  
presented at the LTDATA, LTCLKA, LTDATB, and LTCLKB input pins is ignored. The same port should not be  
selected for both Insert Port A and Insert Port B.  
IPxS4:0  
00000 No Port  
00001 Port 1  
00010 Port 2  
00011 Port 3  
00100 Port 4  
00101 Port 5  
00110 Port 6  
00111 Port 7  
01000 Port 8  
01001 Port 9  
01010 Port 10  
01011 Port 11  
01100 Port 12  
01101 Port 13  
01110 Port 14  
01111 Port 15  
10000 Port 16  
10001 Port 17  
10010 Port 18  
10011 Port 19  
10100 Port 20  
10101 Port 21  
10110 Port 22  
10111 Port 23  
11000 Port 24  
11001 Port 25  
11010 Port 26  
11011 Port 27  
11100 Port 28  
11101 No Port  
11110 No Port  
11111 No Port  
77 of 133  
DS3112  
8 BERT  
The BERT block can generate and detect the following patterns:  
Pseudorandom patterns 27 - 1, 211 - 1, 215 - 1, and QRSS  
A repetitive pattern from 1 to 32 bits in length  
Alternating (16-bit) words that flip every 1 to 256 words  
The BERT receiver has a 32-bit bit counter and a 24-bit error counter. It can generate interrupts on  
detecting a bit error, a change in synchronization, or if an overflow occurs in the bit and error counters.  
See Section 8.1 for details on status bits and interrupts from the BERT block. To activate the BERT  
block, the host must configure the BERT mux via the BERT mux control register (Section 8.1). Data can  
be routed to the receive side of the BERT from either the T3/E3 framer or from one of the 28 T1 or 16/21  
E1 receive ports. Data from the transmit side of the BERT can be inserted either into the T3/E3 framer or  
into one of the 28 T1 or 16/21 E1 transmit ports. See Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 for a visual description of  
where data to and from the BERT can be placed.  
8.1 BERT Register Description  
Register Name:  
BERTMC  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
BERT Mux Control Register  
0x6Eh  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
6
5
4
RBPS4  
0
3
RBPS3  
0
2
RBPS2  
0
1
RBPS1  
0
0
RBPS0  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
12  
TBPS4  
0
11  
TBPS3  
0
10  
TBPS2  
0
9
TBPS1  
0
8
TBPS0  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 4: Receive BERT Port Select Bits 0 to 4 (RBPS0 to RBPS4). These bits determine if data from any of  
the 28 T1 or 16/21 E1 receive ports or the T3/E3 receive framer (with or without the overhead bits) will be routed  
to the receive side of the BERT. If these bits are set to 11101, only the T3/E3 payload data will be routed to the  
receive BERT. If these bits are set to 11110, all T3/E3 data (payload and the overhead bits) will be routed to the  
receive BERT.  
RBPS4:0  
00000 No Data  
00001 Port 1  
00010 Port 2  
00011 Port 3  
00100 Port 4  
00101 Port 5  
00110 Port 6  
00111 Port 7  
10000 Port 16  
10001 Port 17  
10010 Port 18  
10011 Port 19  
10100 Port 20  
10101 Port 21  
10110 Port 22  
10111 Port 23  
01000 Port 8  
01001 Port 9  
01010 Port 10  
01011 Port 11  
01100 Port 12  
01101 Port 13  
01110 Port 14  
01111 Port 15  
11000 Port 24  
11001 Port 25  
11010 Port 26  
11011 Port 27  
11100 Port 28  
11101 T3/E3 Framer (payload bits only)  
11110 T3/E3 Framer (payload + overhead bits)  
11111 Illegal State  
78 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
Bits 8 to 12: Transmit BERT Port Select Bits 0 to 4 (TBPS0 to TBPS4). These bits determine if the transmit  
BERT will be used to replace the normal transmit data on any of the 28 T1 or 16/21 E1 transmit ports or at the  
T3/E3 transmit formatter. If these bits are set to 11101, data from the transmit BERT is only placed in the payload  
bit positions of the T3/E3 data stream. If these bits are set to 11110, then data from the transmit BERT is placed  
into all bit positions of the T3/E3 data stream (payload and the overhead bits).  
TBPS4:0  
00000 No Data  
00001 Port 1  
00010 Port 2  
00011 Port 3  
00100 Port 4  
00101 Port 5  
00110 Port 6  
00111 Port 7  
10000 Port 16  
10001 Port 17  
10010 Port 18  
10011 Port 19  
10100 Port 20  
10101 Port 21  
10110 Port 22  
10111 Port 23  
01000 Port 8  
01001 Port 9  
01010 Port 10  
01011 Port 11  
01100 Port 12  
01101 Port 13  
01110 Port 14  
01111 Port 15  
11000 Port 24  
11001 Port 25  
11010 Port 26  
11011 Port 27  
11100 Port 28  
11101 T3/E3 Framer (payload bits only)  
11110 T3/E3 Framer (payload + overhead bits)  
11111 Illegal State  
79 of 133  
DS3112  
Register Name:  
BERTC0  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
BERT Control Register 0  
70h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
PBS  
0
6
TINV  
0
5
RINV  
0
4
PS2  
0
3
PS1  
0
2
PS0  
0
1
LC  
0
0
RESYNC  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
IESYNC  
0
14  
IEBED  
0
13  
IEOF  
0
12  
n/a  
-
11  
RPL3  
0
10  
RPL2  
0
9
RPL1  
0
8
RPL0  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bit 0: Force Resynchronization (RESYNC). A low to high transition will force the receive BERT synchronizer  
to resynchronize to the incoming data stream. This bit should be toggled from low to high whenever the host  
wishes to acquire synchronization on a new pattern. Must be cleared and set again for a subsequent  
resynchronization.  
Bit 1: Load Bit and Error Counters (LC). A low to high transition latches the current bit and error counts into  
the host accessible registers BERTBC and BERTEC and clears the internal count. This bit should be toggled from  
low to high whenever the host wishes to begin a new acquisition period. Must be cleared and set again for a  
subsequent loads.  
Bits 2 to 4: Pattern Select Bits 0 (PS0 to PS2).  
If PBS = 0:  
000 = Pseudorandom Pattern 27 - 1 (ANSI T1.403-1999 Annex B)  
001 = Pseudorandom Pattern 211 - 1 (ITU O.153)  
010 = Pseudorandom Pattern 215 - 1 (ITU O.151)  
011 = Pseudorandom Pattern QRSS (2E20 - 1 with a one forced if the next 14 positions are zero)  
100 = Repetitive Pattern  
101 = Alternating Word Pattern  
110 = Illegal State  
111 = Illegal State  
If PBS = 1:  
000 = Psuedorandom Pattern 29 - 1  
001 = Pseudorandom Pattern 220 - 1 (non-QRSS)  
010 = Pseudorandom Pattern 223 - 1 (ITU O.151)  
011 = Illegal State  
10X = Illegal State (X = 0 or 1)  
11X = lllegal State (X = 0 or 1)  
Bit 5: Receive Invert Data Enable (RINV).  
0 = do not invert the incoming data stream  
1 = invert the incoming data stream  
Bit 6: Transmit Invert Data Enable (TINV).  
0 = do not invert the outgoing data stream  
1 = invert the outgoing data stream  
Bit 7: Pattern Bank Select (PBS)  
0 = PS[2:0] select a pattern from Pattern Bank 0  
1 = PS[2:0] select a pattern from Pattern Bank 1  
80 of 133  
DS3112  
Bits 8 to 11: Repetitive Pattern Length Bits 5 (RPL0 to RPL3). RPL0 is the LSB and RPL3 is the MSB of a  
nibble that describes the how long the repetitive pattern is. The valid range is 17 (0000) to 32 (1111). These bits are  
ignored if the receive BERT is programmed for a pseudorandom pattern. To create repetitive patterns less than 17  
bits in length, the user must set the length to an integer number of the desired length that is less than or equal to 32.  
For example, to create a 6-bit pattern, the user can set the length to 18 (0001) or to 24 (0111) or to 30 (1101).  
Repetitive Pattern Length Map  
Length  
17 Bits  
21 Bits  
25 Bits  
29 Bits  
Code  
0000  
0100  
1000  
1100  
Length Code  
Length Code  
Length Code  
18 Bits  
22 Bits  
26 Bits  
30 Bits  
0001  
0101  
1001  
1101  
19 Bits  
23 Bits  
27 Bits  
31 Bits  
0010  
0110  
1010  
1101  
20 Bits  
24 Bits  
28 Bits  
32 Bits  
0011  
0111  
1011  
1111  
Bit 13: Interrupt Enable for Counter Overflow (IEOF). Allows the receive BERT to cause an interrupt if either  
the Bit Counter or the Error Counter overflows (Figure 8-1).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt enabled  
Bit 14: Interrupt Enable for Bit Error Detected (IEBED). Allows the receive BERT to cause an interrupt if a bit  
error is detected (Figure 8-1).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt enabled  
Bit 15: Interrupt Enable for Change of Synchronization Status (IESYNC). Allows the receive BERT to cause  
an interrupt if there is a change of state in the synchronization status (i.e., the receive BERT either goes into or out  
of synchronization) (Figure 8-1).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt enabled  
81 of 133  
DS3112  
Register Name:  
BERTC1  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
BERT Control Register 1  
72h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
6
EIB1  
0
5
EIB0  
0
4
SBE  
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
TC  
0
EIB2  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
AWC7  
0
14  
AWC6  
0
13  
AWC5  
0
12  
AWC4  
0
11  
AWC3  
0
10  
AWC2  
0
9
AWC1  
0
8
AWC0  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bit 0: Transmit Pattern Load (TC). A low to high transition loads the pattern generator with Repetitive or  
Pseudorandom pattern that is to be generated. This bit should be toggled from low to high whenever the host  
wishes to load a new pattern. Must be cleared and set again for a subsequent loads.  
Bit 4: Single Bit Error Insert (SBE). A low to high transition will create a single bit error. Must be cleared and  
set again for a subsequent bit error to be inserted.  
Bits 5 to 7: Error Insert Bits (EIB0 to EIB2). Will automatically insert bit errors at the prescribed rate into the  
generated data pattern. Useful for verifying error detection operation.  
EIB2  
EIB1  
EIB0  
ERROR RATE INSERTED  
No errors automatically inserted  
10-1 (1 error per 10 bits)  
10-2 (1 error per 100 bits)  
10-3 (1 error per 1kbits)  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
10-4 (1 error per 10kbits)  
10-5 (1 error per 100kbits)  
10-6 (1 error per 1Mbits)  
10-7 (1 error per 10Mbits)  
Bits 8 to 15: Alternating Word Count Rate (AWC0 to AWC7). When the BERT is programmed in the  
alternating word mode, the word in BERTRP0 will be transmitted for the count loaded into this register plus one,  
then flip to the other word loaded in BERTRP1 and again repeat for the same number of times. The valid count  
range is from 00h to FFh.  
AWC VALUE  
ALTERNATING COUNT ACTION  
00h  
01h  
02h  
06h  
07h  
FFh  
Send the word in BERTRP0 1 time followed by the word in BERTRP1 1 time…  
Send the word in BERTRP0 2 times followed by the word in BERTRP1 2 times…  
Send the word in BERTRP0 3 times followed by the word in BERTRP1 3 times…  
Send the word in BERTRP0 7 times followed by the word in BERTRP1 7 times…  
Send the word in BERTRP0 8 times followed by the word in BERTRP1 8 times…  
Send the word in BERTRP0 256 times followed by the word in BERTRP1 256 times…  
82 of 133  
DS3112  
Register Name:  
BERTRP0  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
BERT Repetitive Pattern 0 (lower word)  
74h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
RP7  
0
6
RP6  
0
5
RP5  
0
4
RP4  
0
3
RP3  
0
2
RP2  
0
1
RP1  
0
0
RP0  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
RP15  
0
14  
RP14  
0
13  
RP13  
0
12  
RP12  
0
11  
RP11  
0
10  
RP10  
0
9
RP9  
0
8
RP8  
0
Register Name:  
BERTRP1  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
BERT Repetitive Pattern 1 (upper word)  
76h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
RP23  
0
6
RP22  
0
5
RP21  
0
4
RP20  
0
3
RP19  
0
2
RP18  
0
1
RP17  
0
0
RP16  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
RP31  
0
14  
RP30  
0
13  
RP29  
0
12  
RP28  
0
11  
RP27  
0
10  
RP26  
0
9
RP25  
0
8
RP24  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 31: BERT Repetitive Pattern Set (RP0 to RP31). RP0 is the LSB and RP31 is the MSB. These registers  
must be properly loaded for the BERT to properly generate and synchronize to either a repetitive pattern, a  
pseudorandom pattern, or a alternating word pattern. For a repetitive pattern that is less than 17 bits, then the  
pattern should be repeated so that all 32 bits are used to describe the pattern. For example, if the pattern was the  
repeating 5-bit pattern …01101… (where rightmost bit is one sent first and received first) then BERTRP0 should  
be loaded with xB5AD and BERTRP1 should be loaded with x5AD6. For a pseudorandom pattern, both registers  
should be loaded with all ones (i.e., xFFFF). For an alternating word pattern, one word should be placed into  
BERTRP0 and the other word should be placed into BERTRP1. For example, if the DDS stress pattern “7E” is to  
be described, the user would place x0000 in BERTRP0 and x7E7E in BERTRP1 and the alternating word counter  
would be set to 50 (decimal) to allow 100 bytes of 00h followed by 100 bytes of 7Eh to be sent and received.  
83 of 133  
DS3112  
Register Name:  
BERTBC0  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
BERT 32-Bit Bit Counter (lower word)  
78h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
BBC7  
0
6
BBC6  
0
5
BBC5  
0
4
BBC4  
0
3
BBC3  
0
2
BBC2  
0
1
BBC1  
0
0
BBC0  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
BBC15  
0
14  
BBC14  
0
13  
BBC13  
0
12  
BBC12  
0
11  
BBC11  
0
10  
BBC10  
0
9
BBC9  
0
8
BBC8  
0
Register Name:  
BERTBC1  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
BERT 32-Bit Bit Counter (upper word)  
7Ah  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
BBC23  
0
6
BBC22  
0
5
BBC21  
0
4
BBC20  
0
3
BBC19  
0
2
BBC18  
0
1
BBC17  
0
0
BBC16  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
BBC31  
0
14  
BBC30  
0
13  
BBC29  
0
12  
BBC28  
0
11  
BBC27  
0
10  
BBC26  
0
9
BBC25  
0
8
BBC24  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 31: BERT 32-Bit Bit Counter (BBC0 to BBC31). This 32-bit counter will increment for each data bit  
(i.e., clock received). This counter is not disabled when the receive BERT loses synchronization. This counter can  
be cleared by toggling the LC control bit in BERTC0. This counter saturates and will not rollover. Upon saturation,  
the BBCO status bit in the BERTEC0 register will be set. This error counter starts counting when the BERT goes  
into receive synchronization (RLOS = 0 or SYNC = 1) and it will not stop counting when the BERT loses  
synchronization. It is recommended that the host toggle the LC bit in BERTC0 register once the BERT has  
synchronized and then toggle the LC bit again when the error-checking period is complete. If the device loses  
synchronization during this period, then the counting results are suspect.  
84 of 133  
DS3112  
Register Name:  
BERTEC0  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
BERT 24-Bit Error Counter (lower) and Status Information  
7Ch  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
6
RA1  
5
RA0  
4
3
2
1
0
SYNC  
RLOS  
BED  
BBCO  
BECO  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
BEC7  
0
14  
BEC6  
0
13  
BEC5  
0
12  
BEC4  
0
11  
BEC3  
0
10  
BEC2  
0
9
BEC1  
0
8
BEC0  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bit 0: Real-Time Synchronization Status (SYNC). Read-only real-time status of the synchronizer (this bit is not  
latched). Will be set when the incoming pattern matches for 32 consecutive bit positions. Will be cleared when six  
or more bits out of 64 are received in error.  
Bit 1: BERT Error Counter Overflow (BECO). A latched read-only event-status bit that is set when the 24-bit  
BERT Error Counter (BEC) saturates. Cleared when read and will not be set again until another overflow occurs  
(i.e., the BEC counter must be cleared and allowed to overflow again). The setting of this status bit can cause a  
hardware interrupt to occur if the IEOF bit in BERT Control Register 0 is set to a one and the BERT bit in the  
Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) register is set to a one. The interrupt will be allowed to clear when this bit is read  
(Figure 8-1).  
Bit 2: BERT Bit Counter Overflow (BBCO). A latched read-only event-status bit that is set when the 32-bit  
BERT Bit Counter (BBC) saturates. Cleared when read and will not be set again until another overflow occurs (i.e.,  
the BBC counter must be cleared and allowed to overflow again). The setting of this status bit can cause a  
hardware interrupt to occur if the IEOF bit in BERT Control Register 0 is set to a one and the BERT bit in the  
Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) register is set to a one. The interrupt will be allowed to clear when this bit is read  
(Figure 8-1).  
Bit 3: Bit Error Detected (BED). A latched read-only event status bit that is set when a bit error is detected. The  
receive BERT must be in synchronization for it to detect bit errors. This bit will be cleared when read. The setting  
of this status bit can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if the IEBED bit in BERT Control Register 0 is set to a one  
and the BERT bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) register is set to a one. The interrupt will be allowed to  
clear when this bit is read (Figure 8-1).  
Bit 4: Receive Loss Of Synchronization (RLOS). A latched read-only alarm-status bit that is set whenever the  
receive BERT begins searching for a pattern. Once synchronization is achieved, this bit will remain set until read.  
A change in this status bit (i.e., the synchronizer goes into or out of synchronization) can cause a hardware interrupt  
to occur if the IESYNC bit in BERT Control Register 0 is set to a one and the BERT bit in the Interrupt Mask for  
MSR (IMSR) register is set to a one. The interrupt will be allowed to clear when this bit is read (Figure 8-1).  
Bit 5: Receive All Zeros (RA0). A latched read-only alarm-status bit that is set when 31 consecutive zeros are  
received. Allowed to be cleared once a one is received.  
Bit 6: Receive All Ones (RA1). A latched read-only alarm-status bit that is set when 31 consecutive ones are  
received. Allowed to be cleared once a zero is received.  
Bits 8 to 15: BERT 24-Bit Error Counter (BEC0 to BEC7). Lower byte of the 24-bit counter. See the  
BERTEC1 register description for details.  
85 of 133  
DS3112  
Figure 8-1. BERT Status Bit Flow  
Internal RLOS  
Signal from  
BERT  
RLOS  
(BERTEC0  
Bit 4)  
Alarm Latch  
Change in State Detect  
IESYNC (BERTC0 Bit 15)  
Event Latch  
Mask  
BED  
(BERTEC0  
Bit 3)  
Internal Bit  
Error Detected  
Signal from  
BERT  
Event Latch  
BERT  
Mask  
Mask  
Status Bit  
(MSR Bit 2)  
OR  
IEBED (BERTC0 Bit 14)  
INT*  
Hardware  
Signal  
BECO or BBCO  
(BERTEC0  
Bits 1 & 2)  
Internal Counter  
Overflow  
Signal from  
BERT  
Mask  
Event Latch  
BERT  
(IMSR Bit 2)  
IEOF (BERTC0 Bit 13)  
NOTE: ALL EVENT AND ALARM LATCHES ABOVE ARE CLEARED WHEN THE BERTEC0 REGISTER IS READ.  
Register Name:  
BERTEC1  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
BERT 24-Bit Error Counter (upper)  
7Eh  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
BEC15  
0
6
BEC14  
0
5
BEC13  
0
4
BEC12  
0
3
BEC11  
0
2
BEC10  
0
1
0
BEC8  
BEC9  
0
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
BEC23  
0
14  
BEC22  
0
13  
BEC21  
0
12  
BEC20  
0
11  
BEC19  
0
10  
BEC18  
0
9
BEC17  
0
8
BEC16  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 15: BERT 24-Bit Error Counter (BEC8 to BEC23). Upper two bytes of the 24-bit counter. This 24-bit  
counter will increment for each data bit received in error. This counter is not disabled when the receive BERT loses  
synchronization. This counter can be cleared by toggling the LC control bit in BERTBC0. This counter saturates  
and will not rollover. Upon saturation, the BECO status bit in the BERTEC0 register will be set. This error counter  
starts counting when the BERT goes into receive synchronization (RLOS = 0 or SYNC = 1) and it will not stop  
counting when the BERT loses synchronization. It is recommended that the host toggle the LC bit in BERTC0  
register once the BERT has synchronized and then toggle the LC bit again when the error checking period is  
complete. If the device loses synchronization during this period, then the counting results are suspect.  
86 of 133  
 
DS3112  
9 HDLC CONTROLLER  
The DS3112 contains an on-board HDLC controller with 256-byte buffers in both the transmit and  
receive paths. When the device is operated in the T3 mode, the HDLC controller is only active in the C-  
Bit Parity mode. When the device is operated in the E3 mode, the user has the option to connect the  
HDLC controller to the Sn bit position. On the receive side, the HDLC controller is always connected to  
the receive E3 framer. If the host does not wish to use the HDLC controller for the Sn bit, then the status  
updates provided by the HDLC controller are ignored. On the transmit side, the host selects the source of  
the Sn via the E3SnC0 and E3SnC1 controls bits in the T3/E3 Control Register (Section 5.2).  
9.1 Receive Operation  
On reset, the receive HDLC controller will flush the receive FIFO and begin searching for a new  
incoming HDLC packet. The receive HDLC controller performs a bit by bit search for a HDLC packet  
and when one is detected, it will zero destuff the incoming data stream and automatically byte align to it  
and place the incoming bytes as they are received into the receive FIFO. The first byte of each packet is  
marked in the receive FIFO by setting the Opening Byte (OBYTE) bit. Upon detecting a closing flag, the  
device will check the 16-bit CRC to see if the packet is valid or not and then mark the last byte of the  
packet in the receive FIFO by setting the Closing Byte (CBYTE) bit. The CRC is not passed to the  
receive FIFO. When the CBYTE bit is set, the host can obtain the status of the incoming packet via the  
Packet Status bits (PS0 and PS1). Incoming packets can be separated by a single flag or even by two flags  
that share a common zero. If the receive FIFO ever fills beyond capacity, the new incoming packet data  
will be discarded and the Receive FIFO Overrun (ROVR) status bit will be set. If such a scenario occurs,  
then the last packet in the FIFO is suspect and should be discarded. When an overflow occurs, the receive  
HDLC will stop accepting packets until either the FIFO is completely emptied or reset. If the receive  
HDLC controller ever detects an incoming abort (seven or more ones in a row), it will set the Receive  
Abort Sequence Detected (RABT) status bit. If an abort sequence is detected in the middle of an  
incoming packet, then the receive HDLC controller will set the Packet Status bits accordingly.  
The receive HDLC has been designed to minimize its real-time host support requirements. The receive  
FIFO is 256 bytes, which is deep enough to store the three T3 packets (Path ID, Idle Signal ID, and Test  
Signal ID) that can arrive once a second. Hence in T3 applications, the host only needs to access the  
receive HDLC once a second to retrieve the three messages. The host will be notified when a new  
message has begun (Receive Packet Start status bit) to be received and when a packet has completed  
(Receive Packet End status bit). Also, the host can be notified when the FIFO has filled beyond a  
programmable level called the high watermark. The host will read the incoming packet data out of the  
receive FIFO a byte at a time. When the receive FIFO is empty, the REMPTY bit in the FIFO will be set.  
9.2 Transmit Operation  
On reset, the transmit HDLC controller will flush the transmit FIFO and transmit an abort followed by  
either 7Eh or FFh (depends on the setting of the TFS control bit) continuously. The transmit HDLC then  
waits until there are at least two bytes in the transmit FIFO before beginning to send the packet. The  
transmit HDLC will automatically add an opening flag of 7Eh to the beginning of the packet and zero  
stuff the outgoing data stream. When the transmit HDLC controller detects that the TMEND bit in the  
transmit FIFO is set, it will automatically calculate and add in the 16-bit CRC checksum followed by a  
closing flag of 7Eh. If the FIFO is empty, then it will begin sending either 7Eh or FFh continuously. If  
there is some more data in the FIFO, then the transmit HDLC will automatically add in the opening flag  
and begin sending the next packet. Between consecutive packets, there are always at least two flags of  
7Eh. If the transmit FIFO ever empties when a packet is being sent (i.e., before the TMEND bit is set),  
87 of 133  
 
DS3112  
then the transmit HDLC controller will send an abort of seven ones in a row (FEh) followed by a  
continuous transmission of either 7Eh (flags) or FFh (idle) and the Transmit FIFO Underrun (TUDR)  
status bit will be set. When the FIFO underruns, the transmit HDLC controller should be reset by the host.  
The transmit HDLC has been designed to minimize its real-time host support requirements. The transmit  
FIFO is 256 bytes, which is deep enough to store the three T3 packets (Path ID, Idle Signal ID, and Test  
Signal ID) that need to be sent once a second. Hence in T3 applications, the host only needs to access the  
transmit HDLC once a second to load up the three messages. Once the host has loaded an outgoing  
packet, it can monitor the Transmit Packet End (TEND) status bit to know when the packet has finished  
being transmitted. Also, the host can be notified when the FIFO has emptied below a programmable level  
called the low watermark. The host must never overfill the FIFO. To keep this from occurring, the host  
can obtain the real-time depth of the transmit FIFO via the Transmit FIFO Level bits in the HDLC Status  
Register (HSR).  
9.2 HDLC Control and FIFO Register Description  
Register Name:  
HCR  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
HDLC Control Register  
80h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
6
RHR  
0
5
THR  
0
4
TFS  
0
3
2
TCRCI  
1
TZSD  
0
0
TCRCD  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
RID  
0
8
TID  
0
RHWMS2 RHWMS1 RHWMS0  
TLWMS2 TLWMS1 TLWMS0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bit 0: Transmit CRC Defeat (TCRCD). When this bit is set low, the HDLC will automatically calculate and  
append the 16-bit CRC to the outgoing HDLC message. When this bit is set high, the device will not append the  
CRC to the outgoing message.  
0 = enable CRC generation (normal operation)  
1 = disable CRC generation  
Bit 1: Transmit Zero Stuffer Defeat (TZSD). When this bit is set low, the HDLC will automatically enable the  
zero stuffer in between the opening and closing flags of the HDLC message. When this bit is set high, the device  
will not enable the zero stuffer under any condition.  
0 = enable zero stuffer (normal operation)  
1 = disable zero stuffer  
Bit 2: Transmit CRC Invert (TCRCI). When this bit is set low, the HDLC will allow the CRC to be generated  
normally. When this bit is set high, the device will invert all 16 bits of the generated CRC. This bit is ignored when  
the CRC generation is disabled (TCRCD = 1). This bit is useful in testing HDLC operation.  
0 = do not invert the generated CRC (normal operation)  
1 = Invert the generated CRC  
Bit 4: Transmit Flag/Idle Select (TFS). This control bit determines whether flags or idle bytes will be transmitted  
in between packets.  
0 = 7Eh (flags)  
1 = FFh (idle)  
88 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Bit 5: Transmit HDLC Reset (THR). A zero to one transition will reset the Transmit HDLC controller. Must be  
cleared and set again for a subsequent reset. A reset will flush the current contents of the transmit FIFO and cause  
one FEh abort sequence (7 ones is a row) to be sent followed by either 7Eh (flags) or FFh (idle) until a new packet  
is initiated by writing new data (at least 2 bytes) into the FIFO.  
Bit 6: Receive HDLC Reset (RHR). A zero to one transition will reset the Receive HDLC controller. Must be  
cleared and set again for a subsequent reset. A reset will flush the current contents of the receive FIFO and cause  
the receive HDLC controller to begin searching for a new incoming HDLC packet.  
Bit 8: Transmit Invert Data (TID). The control bit determines whether all of the data from the HDLC controller  
(including flags and CRC checksum) will be inverted after processing.  
0 = do not invert data (normal operation)  
1 = invert all data  
Bit 9: Receive Invert Data (RID). The control bit determines whether all of the data into the HDLC controller  
(including flags and CRC checksum) will be inverted before processing.  
0 = do not invert data (normal operation)  
1 = invert all data  
Bits 10 to 12: Transmit Low Watermark Select Bits (TLWMS0 to TLWMS2). These control bits determine  
when the HDLC controller should set the TLWM status bit in the HDLC Status Register (HSR). When the transmit  
FIFO contains less than the number of bytes configured by these bits, the TLWM status bit will be set to a one.  
TRANSMIT LOW  
WATERMARK (bytes)  
TLWMS2 TLWMS1 TLWMS0  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
16  
48  
80  
112  
144  
176  
208  
240  
Bits 13 to 15: Receive High Watermark Select Bits (RHWMS0 to RHWMS2). These control bits determine  
when the HDLC controller should set the RHWM status bit in the HDLC Status Register (HSR). When the receive  
FIFO contains more than the number of bytes configured by these bits, the RHWM status bit will be set to a one.  
RECEIVE HIGH  
RHWMS2 RHWMS1  
RHWMS0  
WATERMARK (bytes)  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
16  
48  
80  
112  
144  
176  
208  
240  
89 of 133  
DS3112  
Register Name:  
RHDLC  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
Receive HDLC FIFO  
82h  
Bit #  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name  
Default  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
PS1  
10  
PS0  
9
CBYTE  
8
OBYTE  
Note 1: When the CPU bus is operated in the 8-bit mode (CMS = 1), the host should always read the lower byte (bits 0 to 7) first followed by  
the upper byte (bits 8 to 15). Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Note 2: Packets with three or fewer bytes (including the CRC FCS) in between flags are invalid and the data that appears in the FIFO in  
such instances is meaningless. If only one byte is received between flags, then both the CBYTE and OBYTE bits will be set. If two bytes are  
received, then OBYTE will be set for the first one received and CBYTE will be set for the second byte received. If three bytes are received,  
then OBYTE will be set for the first one received and CBYTE will be set for the third byte received. In all of these cases, the packet status  
will be reported as PS0 = 0/PS1 = 1 and the data in the FIFO should be ignored.  
Bits 0 to 7: Receive FIFO Data (D0 to D7). Data from the Receive FIFO can be read from these bits. D0 is the  
LSB and is received first while D7 is the MSB and is received last.  
Bit 8: Opening Byte (OBYTE). This bit will be set to a one when the byte available at the D0 to D7 bits from the  
Receive FIFO is the first byte of a HDLC packet.  
Bit 9: Closing Byte (CBYTE). This bit will be set to a one when the byte available at the D0 to D7 bits from the  
Receive FIFO is the last byte of a HDLC packet whether the packet is valid or not. The host can use the PS0 and  
PS1 bits to determine if the packet is valid or not.  
Bits 10 and 11: Packet Status Bits 0 and 1 (PS0 and PS1). These bits are only valid when the CBYTE bit is set  
to a one. These bits inform the host of the validity of the incoming packet and the cause of the problem if the  
packet was received in error.  
PACKET  
STATUS  
Valid  
PS1  
PS0  
REASON FOR INVALID RECEPTION OF THE PACKET  
0
0
0
1
Invalid  
Corrupt CRC  
Incoming packet was either too short (three or fewer bytes including the CRC) or  
did not contain an integral number of octets  
Abort sequence detected  
1
1
0
1
Invalid  
Invalid  
90 of 133  
DS3112  
Register Name:  
THDLC  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
Transmit HDLC FIFO  
84h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
D7  
0
6
D6  
0
5
D5  
0
4
D4  
0
3
D3  
0
2
D2  
0
1
D1  
0
0
D0  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
TMEND  
0
Note 1: When the CPU bus is operated in the 8-bit mode (CMS = 1), the host should always write to the lower byte (bits 0 to 7) first followed  
by the upper byte (bits 8 to 15).  
Note 2: The THDLC is a write-only register.  
Note 3: The Transmit FIFO can be filled to a maximum capacity of 256 bytes. When the Transmit FIFO is full, it will not accept any  
additional data.  
Bits 0 to 7: Transmit FIFO Data (D0 to D7). Data for the Transmit FIFO can be written to these bits. D0 is the  
LSB and is transmitted first while D7 is the MSB and is transmitted last.  
Bit 8: Transmit Message End (TMEND). This bit is used to delineate multiple messages in the Transmit FIFO. It  
should be set to a one when the last byte of a packet is written to the Transmit FIFO. The setting of this bit  
indicates to the HDLC controller that the message is complete and that it should calculate and add in the CRC  
checksum and at least two flags. This bit should be set to zero for all other data written to the FIFO. All HDLC  
messages must be at least 2 bytes in length.  
9.3 HDLC Status and Interrupt Register Description  
Register Name:  
HSR  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
HDLC Status Register  
86h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
6
RPE  
5
RPS  
4
RHWM  
3
2
TLWM  
1
0
TUDR  
TEND  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
RABT  
14  
REMPTY  
13  
ROVR  
12  
TEMPTY  
11  
TFL3  
10  
TFL2  
9
8
TFL1  
TFL0  
Note: See Figure 9-1 for details on the signal flow for the status bits in the HSR register. Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other  
bits are read-write.  
Bit 0: Transmit Packet End (TEND). This latched read-only event-status bit will be set to a one each time the  
transmit HDLC controller reads a transmit FIFO byte with the corresponding TMEND bit set or if a FIFO underrun  
occurs. This bit will be cleared when read and will not be set again until another message end is detected. The  
setting of this bit can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if the TEND bit in the Interrupt Mask for HSR (IHSR)  
register is set to a one and the HDLC bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) register is set to a one. The  
interrupt will be allowed to clear when this bit is read.  
Bit 2: Transmit FIFO Low Watermark (TLWM). This read-only real time status bit will be set to a one when  
the transmit FIFO contains less than the number of bytes configured by the Transmit Low Watermark Setting  
control bits (TLWMS0 to TLWMS2) in the HDLC Control Register (HCR). This bit will be cleared when the FIFO  
fills beyond the low watermark. The setting of this bit can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if the TLWM bit in  
the Interrupt Mask for HSR (IHSR) register is set to a one and the HDLC bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR  
(IMSR) register is set to a one.  
91 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Bit 4: Receive FIFO High Watermark (RHWM). This read-only real-time status bit will be set to a one when the  
receive FIFO contains more than the number of bytes configured by the Receive High Watermark Setting control  
bits (RHWMS0 to RHWMS2) in the HDLC Control Register (HCR). This bit will be cleared when the FIFO  
empties below the high watermark. The setting of this bit can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if the RHWM bit  
in the Interrupt Mask for HSR (IHSR) register is set to a one and the HDLC bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR  
(IMSR) register is set to a one.  
Bit 5: Receive Packet Start (RPS). This latched read-only event-status bit will be set to a one each time the  
HDLC controller detects an opening byte of an HDLC packet. This bit will be cleared when read and will not be set  
again until another message is detected. The setting of this bit can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if the RPS bit  
in the Interrupt Mask for HSR (IHSR) register is set to a one and the HDLC bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR  
(IMSR) register is set to a one. The interrupt will be allowed to clear when this bit is read.  
Bit 6: Receive Packet End (RPE). This latched read-only event-status bit will be set to a one each time the HDLC  
controller detects the finish of a message whether the packet is valid (CRC correct) or not (bad CRC, abort  
sequence detected, packet too small, not an integral number of octets, or an overrun occurred). This bit will be  
cleared when read and will not be set again until another message end is detected. The setting of this bit can cause a  
hardware interrupt to occur if the RPE bit in the Interrupt Mask for HSR (IHSR) register is set to a one and the  
HDLC bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) register is set to a one. The interrupt will be allowed to clear  
when this bit is read.  
Bit 7: Transmit FIFO Underrun (TUDR). This latched read-only event-status bit will be set to a one each time  
the transmit FIFO underruns and an abort is automatically sent. This bit will be cleared when read and will not be  
set again until another underrun occurs (i.e., the FIFO has been written to and then allowed to empty again). The  
setting of this bit can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if the TUDR bit in the Interrupt Mask for HSR (IHSR)  
register is set to a one and the HDLC bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) register is set to a one. The  
interrupt will be allowed to clear when this bit is read.  
Bits 8 to 11: Transmit FIFO Level Bits 0 to 3 (TFL0 to TFL3). These read-only real-time status bits indicate the  
current depth of the transmit FIFO with a 16-byte resolution. These status bits cannot cause a hardware interrupt.  
TFL3  
TFL2  
TFL1  
TFL0  
TRANSMIT FIFO LEVEL  
empty to 15 bytes  
16 to 31 bytes  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
32 to 47 bytes  
48 to 63 bytes  
64 to 79 bytes  
80 to 95 bytes  
96 to 111 bytes  
112 to 127 bytes  
128 to 143 bytes  
144 to 159 bytes  
160 to 175 bytes  
176 to 191 bytes  
192 to 207 bytes  
208 to 223 bytes  
224 to 239 bytes  
240 to 256 bytes  
Bit 12: Transmit FIFO Empty (TEMPTY). This read-only real-time status bit will be set to a one when the  
transmit FIFO is empty. It will be cleared when the transmit FIFO contains one or more bytes. This status bit  
cannot cause a hardware interrupt.  
Bit 13: Receive FIFO Overrun (ROVR). This latched read-only event-status bit will be set to a one each time the  
receive FIFO overruns. This bit will be cleared when read and will not be set again until another overrun occurs  
92 of 133  
DS3112  
(i.e., the FIFO has been read from and then allowed to fill up again). The setting of this bit can cause a hardware  
interrupt to occur if the ROVR bit in the Interrupt Mask for HSR (IHSR) register is set to a one and the HDLC bit  
in the Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) register is set to a one. The interrupt will be allowed to clear when this bit is  
read.  
Bit 14: Receive FIFO Empty (REMPTY). This real-time bit will be set to a one when the Receive FIFO is empty  
and will be set to a zero when the Receive FIFO is not empty.  
Bit 15: Receive Abort Sequence Detected (RABT). This latched read-only event-status bit will be set to a one  
each time the receive HDLC controller detects seven or more ones in a row during packet reception. If the receive  
HDLC is not currently receiving a packet, then seven or more ones in a row will not trigger this status bit. This bit  
will be cleared when read and will not be set again until another abort is detected (at least one valid flag must be  
detected before another abort can be detected). The setting of this bit can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if the  
RABT bit in the Interrupt Mask for HSR (IHSR) register is set to a one and the HDLC bit in the Interrupt Mask for  
MSR (IMSR) register is set to a one. The interrupt will be allowed to clear when this bit is read.  
93 of 133  
DS3112  
Figure 9-1. HSR Status Bit Flow  
Transmit  
TEND  
(HSR Bit 0)  
Event Latch  
Packet End  
Signal from  
HDLC  
Mask  
Mask  
TEND (IHSR Bit 0)  
Internal Transmit  
Low Water Mark  
Signal from  
TLWM  
(HSR Bit 2)  
HDLC  
TLWM (IHSR Bit 2)  
Internal Receive  
High Water Mark  
Signal from  
RHWM  
(HSR Bit 4)  
HDLC  
Mask  
Mask  
RHWM (IHSR Bit 4)  
Internal Receive  
Packet Start  
Signal from  
HDLC  
RPS  
(HSR Bit 5)  
Event Latch  
Event Latch  
Event Latch  
Event Latch  
RPS (IHSR Bit 5)  
HDLC  
Status Bit  
(MSR Bit 3)  
Internal Receive  
Packet End  
Signal from  
HDLC  
RPE  
(HSR Bit 6)  
OR  
INT*  
Hardware  
Signal  
Mask  
Mask  
RPE (IHSR Bit 6)  
HDLC  
(IMSR Bit 3)  
Internal Transmit  
FIFO Underrun  
Signal from  
HDLC  
TUDR  
(HSR Bit 7)  
Mask  
Mask  
Mask  
TUDR (IHSR Bit 7)  
Internal Receive  
FIFO Overrun  
Signal from  
HDLC  
ROVR  
(HSR Bit 13)  
ROVR (IHSR Bit 13)  
RABT  
Internal Receive  
Abort Detect  
Signal from  
HDLC  
Event Latch  
(HSR Bit 15)  
RABT (IHSR Bit 15)  
NOTE: ALL EVENT LATCHES ABOVE ARE CLEARED WHEN THE HSR REGISTER IS READ.  
94 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Register Name:  
IHSR  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
Interrupt Mask for HDLC Status Register  
88h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
TUDR  
0
6
RPE  
0
5
RPS  
0
4
RHWM  
0
3
2
TLWM  
0
1
0
TEND  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
RABT  
0
14  
13  
ROVR  
0
12  
11  
10  
9
8
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bit 0: Transmit Packet End (TEND).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 2: Transmit FIFO Low Watermark (TLWM).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 4: Receive FIFO High Watermark (RHWM).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 5: Receive Packet Start (RPS).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 6: Receive Packet End (RPE).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 7: Transmit FIFO Underrun (TUDR).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 13: Receive FIFO Overrun (ROVR).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 15: Receive Abort Sequence Detected (RABT).  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
95 of 133  
DS3112  
10 FEAC CONTROLLER  
The DS3112 contains an onboard FEAC controller. When the device is operated in the T3 mode, the  
FEAC controller is only active in the C-Bit Parity Mode. When the device is operated in the E3 mode, the  
user has the option to connect the FEAC controller to the Sn bit position. On the receive side, the FEAC  
controller is always connected to the receive E3 framer. If the host does not wish to use the FEAC  
controller for the Sn bit, then the status updates provided by the FEAC controller are ignored. On the  
transmit side, the host selects the source of the Sn via the E3SnC0 and E3SnC1 controls bits in the T3/E3  
Control Register (Section 5.2).  
The DS3112 can both detect and generate Far End Alarm Codewords (FEAC). The FEAC codeword is a  
repeating 16 bit pattern of the form ...0xxxxxx011111111... where the rightmost bit is transmitted first.  
The FEAC codeword must be transmitted at least 10 times. When no FEAC codeword is being  
transmitted, the data pattern should be forced to all ones.  
The receive FEAC detector does a bit by bit search for a data pattern of the form of a FEAC codeword.  
Once found, the receive FEAC detector validates incoming codewords by checking to see that the same  
codeword is found in three consecutive opportunities. Once validated, a codeword is considered no longer  
present when it is received incorrectly twice in a row. Once a codeword is validated, the Receive FEAC  
Codeword Detect (RFCD) status bit is set and the codeword is written into the Receive FEAC FIFO for  
the host to read. The host can use the RFCD status to know when to read the Receive FEAC FIFO. The  
Receive FEAC FIFO is four codewords deep. If the FIFO is full when the receive FEAC detector  
attempts to write a new incoming codeword, the latest incoming codeword(s) will be discarded and the  
Receive FEAC FIFO Overflow (RFFO) status bit will be set.  
The DS3112 can transmit two different FEAC codewords. This is useful if the host wishes to generate a  
Loopback Command which is made up of 10 FEAC codewords that indicate the type of loopback  
followed by 10 FEAC codewords that indicate which line is to be looped back.  
10.1 FEAC Control Register Description  
Register Name:  
FCR  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
FEAC Control Register  
90h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
TFS1  
0
6
TFS0  
0
5
TFCA5  
0
4
TFCA4  
0
3
TFCA3  
0
2
TFCA2  
0
1
TFCA1  
0
0
TFCA0  
0
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
RFR  
0
14  
IERFI  
13  
TFCB5  
0
12  
TFCB4  
0
11  
TFCB3  
0
10  
TFCB2  
0
9
TFCB1  
0
8
TFCB0  
0
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bits 0 to 5: Transmit FEAC Codeword A Data (TFCA0 to TFCA5). The FEAC codeword is of the form  
...0xxxxxx011111111... where the rightmost bit is transmitted first. These six bits are the middle six bits of the  
second byte of the FEAC codeword (i.e., the six “x” bits). The device can generate two different codewords and  
these six bits represent what will be transmitted for codeword A. TFCA0 is the LSB and is transmitted first while  
TFCA5 is the MSB and is transmitted last. The TFS0 and TFS1 control bits determine if this codeword is to be  
generated. These bits should only be changed when the transmit FEAC controller is in the idle state (TFS0 = 0 and  
TFS1 = 0).  
96 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Bits 6 and 7: Transmit FEAC Codeword Select Bits 0 and 1 (TFS0 and TFS1). These two bits control what  
two available codewords should be generated. Both TFS0 and TFS1 are edge triggered. To change the action, the  
host must go back to the null state (TFS0 = TFS1 = 0) before proceeding to the desired action. Wait a minimum of  
(10) codewords before changing to out-of-idle state.  
TFS1  
TFS0  
ACTION  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Idle state; do not generate a FEAC codeword (send all ones)  
Send 10 of codeword A followed by all ones  
Send 10 of codeword A followed by 10 of codeword B followed by all ones  
Send codeword A continuously (will be sent for at least 10 times)  
Bits 8 to 13: Transmit FEAC Codeword B Data (TFCB0 to TFCB5). The FEAC codeword is of the form  
...0xxxxxx011111111... where the rightmost bit is transmitted first. These six bits are the middle six bits of the  
second byte of the FEAC codeword (i.e., the six “x” bits). The device can generate two different codewords and  
these six bits represent what will be transmitted for codeword B. TFCB0 is the LSB and is transmitted first while  
TFCB5 is the MSB and is transmitted last. The TFS0 and TFS1 control bits determine if this codeword is to be  
generated. These bits should only be changed when the transmit FEAC controller is in the idle state (TFS0 = 0 and  
TFS1 = 0).  
Bit 14: Interrupt Enable, Receive FEAC Idle (IERFI). This bit masks or enables interrupts caused by the  
Receive FEAC Idle (RFI) bit in the FSR register.  
0 = interrupt masked  
1 = interrupt unmasked  
Bit 15: Receive FEAC Controller Reset (RFR). A zero to one transition will reset the receive FEAC controller  
and flush the Receive FEAC FIFO. This bit must be cleared and set again for a subsequent reset.  
97 of 133  
DS3112  
10.2 FEAC Status Register Description  
Register Name:  
FSR  
Register Description:  
Register Address:  
FEAC Status Register  
92h  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
RFI  
0
RFCD  
Bit #  
Name  
Default  
15  
RFFO  
14  
RFFE  
13  
RFF5  
12  
RFF4  
11  
RFF3  
10  
RFF2  
9
8
RFF1  
RFF0  
Note: Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.  
Bit 0: Receive FEAC Codeword Detected (RFCD). This latched read-only event-status bit will be set to a one  
each time the FEAC controller has detected and validated a new FEAC codeword. This bit will be cleared when  
read and will not be set again until another new codeword is detected. The setting of this bit can cause a hardware  
interrupt to occur if the FEAC bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) register is set to a one. The interrupt will  
be allowed to clear when this bit is read.  
Bit 1: Receive FEAC Idle (RFI). This latched read-only event status bit will be set to a one each time the FEAC  
controller has detected 16 consecutive ones following a valid codeword. This bit will be cleared when read. The  
setting of this bit can cause a hardware interrupt to occur if the IERFI bit in the FEAC Control Register (FCR) is  
set to one and the FEAC bit in the Interrupt Mask for MSR (IMSR) is set to one.  
Bits 8 to 13: Receive FEAC FIFO Data (RFF0 to RFF5). Data from the Receive FEAC FIFO can be read from  
these bits. The FEAC codeword is of the form ...0xxxxxx011111111... where the rightmost bit is received first.  
These six bits are the debounced and integrated middle six bits of the second byte of the FEAC codeword (i.e., the  
six “x” bits). RFF0 is the LSB and is received first while RFF5 is the MSB and is received last.  
Bit 14: Receive FEAC FIFO Empty (RFFE). This read-only real time status bit will be set to a one when the  
Receive FEAC FIFO is empty and hence the RFF0 to RFF5 bits contain no valid information.  
Bit 15: Receive FEAC FIFO Overflow (RFFO). This latched read-only event-status bit will be set to a one when  
the receive FEAC controller has attempted to write to an already full Receive FEAC FIFO and current incoming  
FEAC codeword is lost. This bit will be cleared when read and will not be set again until another FIFO overflow  
occurs (i.e., the Receive FEAC FIFO has been read and then fills beyond capacity).  
98 of 133  
 
DS3112  
11 JTAG  
The DS3112 device supports the standard instruction codes SAMPLE/PRELOAD, BYPASS, and  
EXTEST. Optional public instructions included are HIGHZ, CLAMP, IDCODE (Figure 11-1). The  
DS3112 contains the following items that meet the requirements set by the IEEE 1149.1 Standard Test  
Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture:  
Test Access Port (TAP)  
TAP Controller  
Instruction Register  
Bypass Register  
Boundary Scan Register  
Device Identification Register  
The Test Access Port has the necessary interface pins, namely JTCLK, JTRST, JTDI, JTDO, and JTMS.  
Details on these pins can be found in Section 2.9. Details on the Boundary Scan Architecture and the Test  
Access Port can be found in IEEE 1149.1-1990, IEEE 1149.1a-1993, and IEEE 1149.1b-1994.  
Figure 11-1. JTAG Block Diagram  
Boundary Scan  
Register  
Identification  
Register  
Mux  
Bypass  
Register  
Instruction  
Register  
Select  
Test Access Port  
Controller  
Tri-State  
10K  
10K  
10K  
JTDI  
JTMS  
JTCLK  
JTDO  
JTRST  
99 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
11.1 TAP Controller State Machine Description  
This section describes the operation of the test access port (TAP) controller state machine (Figure 11-2).  
The TAP controller is a finite state machine that responds to the logic level at JTMS on the rising edge of  
JTCLK.  
Figure 11-2. TAP Controller State Machine  
Test-Logic-Reset  
1
0
1
1
Select  
Select  
1
Run-Test/Idle  
DR-Scan  
IR-Scan  
0
0
0
1
1
Capture-DR  
0
Capture-IR  
0
Shift-DR  
1
Shift-IR  
1
0
1
0
1
Exit1- DR  
0
Exit1-IR  
0
Pause-DR  
1
Pause-IR  
1
0
0
0
0
Exit2-DR  
1
Exit2-IR  
1
Update-DR  
Update-IR  
1
0
1
0
100 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
11.1.1 Test-Logic-Reset  
Upon power-up of the DS3112, the TAP controller will be in the Test-Logic-Reset state. The Instruction  
register will contain the IDCODE instruction. All system logic on the DS3112 will operate normally.  
11.1.2 Run-Test-Idle  
Run-Test-Idle is used between scan operations or during specific tests. The Instruction register and Test  
register will remain idle.  
11.1.3 Select-DR-Scan  
All test registers retain their previous state. With JTMS low, a rising edge of JTCLK moves the controller  
into the Capture-DR state and will initiate a scan sequence. JTMS high moves the controller to the Select-  
IR-SCAN state.  
11.1.4 Capture-DR  
Data can be parallel-loaded into the Test Data registers selected by the current instruction. If the  
instruction does not call for a parallel load or the selected register does not allow parallel loads, the Test  
register will remain at its current value. On the rising edge of JTCLK, the controller will go to the Shift-  
DR state if JTMS is low or it will go to the Exit1-DR state if JTMS is high.  
11.1.5 Shift-DR  
The Test Data register selected by the current instruction will be connected between JTDI and JTDO and  
will shift data one stage towards its serial output on each rising edge of JTCLK. If a Test register selected  
by the current instruction is not placed in the serial path, it will maintain its previous state.  
11.1.6 Exit1-DR  
While in this state, a rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS high will put the controller in the Update-DR  
state, which terminates the scanning process. A rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS low will put the  
controller in the Pause-DR state.  
11.1.7 Pause-DR  
Shifting of the Test registers is halted while in this state. All Test registers selected by the current  
instruction will retain their previous state. The controller will remain in this state while JTMS is low. A  
rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS high will put the controller in the Exit2-DR state.  
11.1.8 Exit2-DR  
While in this state, a rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS high will put the controller in the Update-DR  
state and terminate the scanning process. A rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS low will enter the Shift-DR  
state.  
11.1.9 Update-DR  
A falling edge on JTCLK while in the Update-DR state will latch the data from the shift register path of  
the Test registers into the data output latches. This prevents changes at the parallel output due to changes  
in the shift register. A rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS low will put the controller in the Run-Test-Idle  
state. With JTMS high, the controller will enter the Select-DR-Scan state.  
11.1.10  
Select-IR-Scan  
All Test registers retain their previous state. The Instruction register will remain unchanged during this  
state. With JTMS low, a rising edge on JTCLK moves the controller into the Capture-IR state and will  
initiate a scan sequence for the Instruction register. JTMS high during a rising edge on JTCLK puts the  
controller back into the Test-Logic-Reset state.  
101 of 133  
 
DS3112  
11.1.11  
Capture-IR  
The Capture-IR state is used to load the shift register in the Instruction register with a fixed value. This  
value is loaded on the rising edge of JTCLK. If JTMS is high on the rising edge of JTCLK, the controller  
will enter the Exit1-IR state. If JTMS is low on the rising edge of JTCLK, the controller will enter the  
Shift-IR state.  
11.1.12  
Shift-IR  
In this state, the shift register in the Instruction register is connected between JTDI and JTDO and shifts  
data one stage for every rising edge of JTCLK towards the serial output. The parallel register, as well as  
all Test registers remain at their previous states. A rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS high will move the  
controller to the Exit1-IR state. A rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS low will keep the controller in the  
Shift-IR state while moving data one stage through the Instruction shift register.  
11.1.13  
Exit1-IR  
A rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS low will put the controller in the Pause-IR state. If JTMS is high on  
the rising edge of JTCLK, the controller will enter the Update-IR state and terminate the scanning  
process.  
11.1.14  
Pause-IR  
Shifting of the Instruction register is halted temporarily. With JTMS high, a rising edge on JTCLK will  
put the controller in the Exit2-IR state. The controller will remain in the Pause-IR state if JTMS is low  
during a rising edge on JTCLK.  
11.1.15  
Exit2-IR  
A rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS high will put the controller in the Update-IR state. The controller  
will loop back to the Shift-IR state if JTMS is low during a rising edge of JTCLK in this state.  
11.1.16  
Update-IR  
The instruction shifted into the Instruction shift register is latched into the parallel output on the falling  
edge of JTCLK as the controller enters this state. Once latched, this instruction becomes the current  
instruction. A rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS low will put the controller in the Run-Test-Idle state.  
With JTMS high, the controller will enter the Select-DR-Scan state.  
102 of 133  
 
DS3112  
11.2 Instruction Register and Instructions  
The Instruction register contains a shift register as well as a latched parallel output and is 3 bits in length.  
When the TAP controller enters the Shift-IR state, the instruction shift register will be connected between  
JTDI and JTDO. While in the Shift-IR state, a rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS low will shift data one  
stage towards the serial output at JTDO. A rising edge on JTCLK in the Exit1-IR state or the Exit2-IR  
state with JTMS high will move the controller to the Update-IR state. The falling edge of that same  
JTCLK will latch the data in the instruction shift register to the instruction parallel output. Instructions  
supported by the DS3112 and their respective operational binary codes are shown in Table 11-1.  
Table 11-1. Instruction Codes  
INSTRUCTIONS  
SAMPLE/PRELOAD  
BYPASS  
SELECTED REGISTER INSTRUCTION CODES  
Boundary Scan  
Bypass  
010  
111  
000  
011  
100  
001  
EXTEST  
CLAMP  
HIGH-Z  
IDCODE  
Boundary Scan  
Bypass  
Bypass  
Device Identification  
11.2.1 SAMPLE/PRELOAD  
A mandatory instruction for the IEEE 1149.1 specification that supports two functions. The digital I/Os of  
the DS3112 can be sampled at the Boundary Scan register without interfering with the normal operation  
of the device by using the Capture-DR state. SAMPLE/PRELOAD also allows the DS3112 to shift data  
into the Boundary Scan register via JTDI using the Shift-DR state.  
11.2.2 EXTEST  
EXTEST allows testing of all interconnections to the DS3112. When the EXTEST instruction is latched  
in the instruction register, the following actions occur. Once enabled via the Update-IR state, the parallel  
outputs of all digital output pins will be driven. The Boundary Scan register will be connected between  
JTDI and JTDO. The Capture-DR will sample all digital inputs into the Boundary Scan register.  
11.2.3 BYPASS  
When the BYPASS instruction is latched into the parallel Instruction register, JTDI connects to JTDO  
through the one-bit Bypass Test register. This allows data to pass from JTDI to JTDO not affecting the  
device's normal operation.  
11.2.4 IDCODE  
When the IDCODE instruction is latched into the parallel Instruction register, the Identification Test  
register is selected. The device identification code will be loaded into the Identification register on the  
rising edge of JTCLK following entry into the Capture-DR state. Shift-DR can be used to shift the  
identification code out serially via JTDO. During Test-Logic-Reset, the identification code is forced into  
the instruction register's parallel output. The device ID code will always have a one in the LSB position.  
The next 11 bits identify the manufacturer’s JEDEC number and number of continuation bytes followed  
by 16 bits for the device and 4 bits for the version. The device ID code for the DS3112 is 0000B143h.  
11.2.5 HIGHZ  
All digital outputs will be placed into a high impedance state. The Bypass Register will be connected  
between JTDI and JTDO.  
103 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
11.2.6 CLAMP  
All digital outputs will output data from the boundary scan parallel output while connecting the Bypass  
Register between JTDI and JTDO. The outputs will not change during the CLAMP instruction.  
11.3 Test Registers  
IEEE 1149.1 requires a minimum of two test registers, the bypass register and the boundary scan register.  
An optional test register, the Identification register, has been included in the DS3112 design. It is used in  
conjunction with the IDCODE instruction and the Test-Logic-Reset state of the TAP controller.  
11.3.1 Bypass Register  
This is a single one-bit shift register used in conjunction with the BYPASS, CLAMP, and HIGH-Z  
instructions that provides a short path between JTDI and JTDO.  
11.3.2 Identification Register  
The Identification register contains a 32-bit shift register and a 32-bit latched parallel output. This register  
is selected during the IDCODE instruction and when the TAP controller is in the Test-Logic-Reset state.  
11.3.3 Boundary Scan Register  
This register contains both a shift register path and a latched parallel output for all control cells and  
digital I/O cells and is 196 bits in length. Table 11-2 shows all the cell bit locations and definitions.  
Table 11-2. Boundary Scan Control Bits  
I/O OR CONTROL BIT  
BIT  
SYMBOL  
PIN  
DESCRIPTION  
0 = outputs are active  
1 = outputs are tri-state (“z”)  
I
0 = CINT is a zero (“0”)  
1 = CINT is tri-state (“z”)  
0
1
2
OUT_ENB  
TEST  
Control bit  
C3  
CINT_ENB_N Control bit  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
CINT_OUT  
CINT_IN  
CMS  
A2  
A2  
B2  
B3  
C4  
D5  
A3  
B4  
C5  
B6  
C7  
A7  
C8  
B8  
A8  
C9  
B9  
A9  
C10  
O (open drain)  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
CIM  
CCS  
CRD  
CWR  
T3E3MS  
RST  
G.747E  
CALE  
FRMECU  
FRLOF  
FRLOS  
FRSOF  
FRDEN  
FRD  
FRCLK  
FTDEN  
104 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
I/O OR CONTROL BIT  
DESCRIPTION  
BIT  
SYMBOL  
PIN  
22  
23  
FTD  
FTCLK  
B10  
A10  
I
I
FTSOF_ENB_  
N
1 = FTSOF is an input  
0 = FTSOF is an output  
24  
Control bit  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
FTSOF_OUT  
FTSOF_IN  
FTMEI  
A11  
A11  
C11  
C12  
A13  
B13  
A14  
B14  
C14  
G19  
G20  
H18  
H19  
H20  
J18  
O
I
I
I
I
HRNEG  
HRCLK  
HRPOS  
HTNEG  
HTCLK  
HTPOS  
I
O
O
O
I
I
I
LTCCLK  
LRCCLK  
LTCLK28  
LTDAT28  
LRCLK28  
LRDAT28  
LTCLK27  
LTDAT27  
LRCLK27  
LRDAT27  
LTCLK26  
LTDAT26  
LRCLK26  
LRDAT26  
LTCLK25  
LTDAT25  
LRCLK25  
LRDAT25  
LTCLK24  
LTDAT24  
LRCLK24  
LRDAT24  
LTCLK23  
LTDAT23  
LRCLK23  
LRDAT23  
LTCLK22  
LTDAT22  
LRCLK22  
LRDAT22  
LTCLK21  
LTDAT21  
LRCLK21  
LRDAT21  
LTCLK20  
LTDAT20  
I
O
O
I
J19  
J20  
I
K18  
K19  
K20  
L20  
L18  
L19  
M20  
M19  
M18  
M17  
N20  
N19  
N18  
P20  
P19  
P18  
R20  
R19  
P17  
R18  
T20  
T19  
T18  
U20  
V20  
T17  
U18  
U19  
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
105 of 133  
DS3112  
I/O OR CONTROL BIT  
DESCRIPTION  
BIT  
SYMBOL  
PIN  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
LRCLK20  
LRDAT20  
LTCLK19  
LTDAT19  
LRCLK19  
LRDAT19  
LTCLK18  
LTDAT18  
LRCLK18  
LRDAT18  
LTCLK17  
LTDAT17  
LRCLK17  
LRDAT17  
LTCLK16  
LTDAT16  
LRCLK16  
LRDAT16  
LTCLK15  
LTDAT15  
LRCLK15  
LRDAT15  
LTCLK14  
LTDAT14  
LRCLK14  
LRDAT14  
LTCLK13  
LTDAT13  
LRCLK13  
LRDAT13  
LTCLK12  
LTDAT12  
LRCLK12  
LRDAT12  
LTCLK11  
LTDAT11  
LRCLK11  
LRDAT11  
LTCLK10  
LTDAT10  
LRCLK10  
LRDAT10  
LTCLK9  
V19  
W20  
Y20  
W19  
V18  
Y19  
W18  
V17  
U16  
Y18  
W17  
V16  
Y17  
W16  
V15  
U14  
Y16  
W15  
V14  
Y15  
W14  
Y14  
V13  
W13  
Y13  
V12  
W12  
Y12  
V11  
W11  
Y11  
Y10  
V10  
W10  
Y9  
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
99  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
I
O
O
I
W9  
V9  
U9  
Y8  
W8  
V8  
Y7  
W7  
V7  
Y6  
W6  
U7  
V6  
Y5  
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
LTDAT9  
LRCLK9  
LRDAT9  
LTCLK8  
LTDAT8  
I
O
O
I
I
O
LRCLK8  
106 of 133  
DS3112  
I/O OR CONTROL BIT  
DESCRIPTION  
BIT  
SYMBOL  
PIN  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
143  
144  
145  
146  
147  
148  
149  
150  
151  
152  
153  
154  
155  
156  
157  
158  
159  
160  
161  
162  
163  
164  
165  
166  
167  
LRDAT8  
LTCLK7  
LTDAT7  
LRCLK7  
LRDAT7  
LTCLK6  
LTDAT6  
LRCLK6  
LRDAT6  
LTCLK5  
LTDAT5  
LRCLK5  
LRDAT5  
LTCLK4  
LTDAT4  
LRCLK4  
LRDAT4  
LTCLK3  
LTDAT3  
LRCLK3  
LRDAT3  
LTCLK2  
LTDAT2  
LRCLK2  
LRDAT2  
LTCLK1  
LTDAT1  
LRCLK1  
LRDAT1  
LTCLKB  
LTDATB  
LRCLKB  
LRDATB  
LTCLKA  
LTDATA  
LRCLKA  
LRDATA  
CA7  
W5  
V5  
Y4  
Y3  
U5  
V4  
W4  
Y2  
W3  
V3  
W1  
V2  
U3  
T4  
V1  
U2  
T3  
U1  
T2  
R3  
P4  
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
R2  
P3  
R1  
P2  
I
O
O
I
P1  
N3  
N2  
N1  
M3  
M2  
M1  
L3  
L2  
L1  
K1  
K3  
K2  
J1  
J2  
J3  
J4  
H1  
H2  
H3  
G1  
G1  
G2  
G2  
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
O
I
O
I
CA6  
CA5  
CA4  
CA3  
CA2  
CA1  
CA0  
CD15_OUT  
CD15_IN  
CD14_OUT  
CD14_IN  
107 of 133  
DS3112  
I/O OR CONTROL BIT  
DESCRIPTION  
BIT  
SYMBOL  
PIN  
168  
169  
170  
171  
172  
173  
174  
175  
176  
177  
178  
179  
180  
181  
182  
183  
184  
185  
186  
187  
188  
189  
190  
191  
192  
193  
194  
195  
CD13_OUT  
CD13_IN  
CD12_OUT  
CD12_IN  
CD11_OUT  
CD11_IN  
CD10_OUT  
CD10_IN  
CD9_OUT  
CD9_IN  
CD8_OUT  
CD8_IN  
CD7_OUT  
CD7_IN  
CD6_OUT  
CD6_IN  
CD5_OUT  
CD5_IN  
CD4_OUT  
CD4_IN  
CD3_OUT  
CD3_IN  
CD2_OUT  
CD2_IN  
CD1_OUT  
CD1_IN  
G3  
G3  
F1  
F1  
F2  
F2  
G4  
G4  
F3  
F3  
E1  
E1  
E2  
E2  
E3  
E3  
D1  
D1  
C1  
C1  
E4  
E4  
D3  
D3  
D2  
D2  
C2  
C2  
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
I
CD0_OUT  
CD0_IN  
1 = CD is an input  
0 = CD is an output  
196  
CD_ENB_N  
Control bit  
108 of 133  
DS3112  
12 DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS  
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS  
Voltage Range on Any Pin with Respect to VSS (except VDD)……………………………...-0.3V to +5.5V  
Supply Voltage (VDD) Range with Respect to VSS……………………………….………..-0.3V to +3.63V  
Operating Temperature Range………………………………………………………………..0°C to +70°C  
Storage Temperature Range………………………………………………………………-55°C to +125°C  
Soldering Temperature………………………………………….See IPC/JEDEC J-STD-020 Specification  
Note: The typical values listed below are not production tested.  
This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated in the operation  
sections of this specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for extended periods of time can affect  
reliability.  
Table 12-1. Recommended DC Operating Conditions  
(TA = 0°C to +70°C for DS3112, TA = -40°C to +85°C for DS3112N.)  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
5.5  
UNITS NOTES  
Logic 1  
Logic 0  
Supply  
VIH  
2.2  
V
V
V
VIL  
VDD  
-0.3  
3.135  
0.8  
3.465  
Table 12-2. DC Characteristics  
(VDD = 3.3V ±5%, TA = 0°C to +70°C for DS3112; TA = -40°C to +85°C for DS3112N.)  
PARAMETER  
Supply Current at VDD = 3.465V  
Pin Capacitance  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
TYP  
150  
7
MAX  
UNITS NOTES  
IDD  
CIO  
IIL  
mA  
pF  
1
Input Leakage  
-10  
-500  
-10  
+10  
+500  
+10  
2
2
3
µA  
µA  
µA  
mA  
mA  
Input Leakage (with Pullups)  
Output Leakage  
IILP  
ILO  
IOH  
IOL  
Output Current (2.4V)  
Output Current (0.4V)  
-4.0  
+4.0  
NOTES:  
1) FTCLK = HRCLK = 44.736MHz and LTCLK1 to LTCLK28 = 1.544MHz; other inputs at VDD or  
grounded; other outputs left open-circuited.  
2) 0V < VIN < VDD.  
3) Outputs in tri-state.  
109 of 133  
 
DS3112  
13 AC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS  
Table 13-1. AC Characteristics—Low-Speed (T1 and E1) Ports  
(VDD = 3.3V ±5%, TA = 0°C to +70°C for DS3112; TA = -40°C to +85°C for DS3112N.)  
(See Figure 13-1.)  
PARAMETER  
LRCLK/LRCCLK/LTCLK/LTCCLK  
Clock Period  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
TYP  
648  
488  
324  
244  
MAX  
UNITS NOTES  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
1
2
1
2
t1  
294  
204  
354  
284  
LRCLK Clock High Time  
t2  
t2  
t3  
t3  
LTCLK/LTCCLK/LRCCLK Clock  
High Time  
100  
ns  
294  
204  
324  
244  
354  
284  
ns  
ns  
1
2
LRCLK Clock Low Time  
LTCLK/LTCCLK/LRCCLK Clock  
Low Time  
100  
ns  
LTDAT Setup Time to the Falling  
Edge or Rising Edge of  
LTCLK/LTCCLK  
LTDAT Hold Time from the Falling  
Edge or Rising Edge of  
LTCLK/LTCCLK  
Delay from the Rising Edge or  
Falling Edge of LRCLK to Data  
Valid on LRDAT  
Delay from the Rising Edge or  
Falling Edge of LRCCLK to Data  
Valid on LRDAT  
t4  
t5  
t6  
t6  
50  
ns  
50  
ns  
ns  
ns  
50  
100  
5
NOTES:  
1) T3 mode.  
2) E3 mode.  
3) In normal mode, LTDAT is sampled on the falling edge of LTCLK/LTCCLK and LRDAT is updated on the  
rising edge of LRCLK/LRCCLK.  
4) In inverted mode, LTDAT is sampled on the rising edge of LTCLK/LTCCLK and LRDAT is updated on the  
falling edge of LRCLK/LRCCLK.  
5) LRCCLK is enabled. (See Section 4.2 and Figure 1-1, Figure 1-2, and Figure 1-3 for details.)  
110 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Figure 13-1. Low-Speed (T1 and E1) Port AC Timing Diagram  
t1  
t2  
t3  
LRCLK (or LRCCLK) /  
LTCLK (or LTCCLK)  
Normal Mode  
LRCLK (or LRCCLK) /  
LTCLK (or LTCCLK)  
Inverted Mode  
t4  
t5  
LTDAT  
LRDAT  
t6  
ls_ac  
111 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Table 13-2. AC Characteristics—High-Speed (T3 and E3) Ports  
(VDD = 3.3V ±5%, TA = 0°C to +70°C for DS3112; TA = -40°C to +85°C for DS3112N.)  
(See Figure 13-2.)  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL MIN  
TYP  
22.4  
29.1  
MAX UNITS  
NOTES  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
1, 3  
2, 3  
HRCLK/HTCLK Clock Period  
t1  
HRCLK Clock Low Time  
HRCLK Clock High Time  
HRPOS/HRNEG Setup Time to the  
Rising Edge or Falling Edge of  
HRCLK  
HRPOS/HRNEG Hold Time from the  
Rising Edge or Falling Edge of  
HRCLK  
t2  
t3  
9
9
t4  
t5  
t6  
3
3
3
ns  
ns  
Delay from the Rising Edge or  
Falling Edge of HTCLK to Data  
Valid on HTPOS/HTNEG  
10  
ns  
NOTES:  
1) T3 mode.  
2) E3 mode.  
3) HTCLK is a buffered version of either FTCLK or HRCLK and, as such, the duty cycle of HTCLK is  
determined by the source clock.  
4) In normal mode, HRPOS and HRNEG are sampled on the rising edge of HRCLK and HTPOS and HTNEG are  
updated on the rising edge of HTCLK.  
5) In inverted mode, HRPOS and HRNEG are sampled on the falling edge of HRCLK and HTPOS and HTNEG  
are updated on the falling edge of HTCLK.  
Figure 13-2. High-Speed (T3 and E3) Port AC Timing Diagram  
t1  
t2  
t3  
HRCLK / HTCLK  
Normal Mode  
HRCLK / HTCLK  
Inverted Mode  
t4  
t5  
HRPOS / HRNEG  
HTPOS / HTNEG  
t6  
ls_ac  
112 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
Table 13-3. AC Characteristics–Framer (T3 and E3) Ports  
(VDD = 3.3V ±5%, TA = 0°C to +70°C for DS3112; TA = -40°C to +85°C for DS3112N.)  
(See Figure 13-3.)  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
TYP  
22.4  
29.1  
MAX  
UNITS NOTES  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
1, 3  
2, 3  
FRCLK/FTCLK Clock Period  
t1  
FTCLK Clock Low Time  
FTCLK Clock High Time  
FTD/FTSOF Setup Time to the  
Rising Edge or Falling Edge of  
FTCLK  
FTD/FTSOF Hold Time from the  
Rising Edge or Falling Edge of  
FTCLK  
t2  
t3  
9
9
t4  
t5  
3
3
ns  
ns  
4
4
Delay from the Rising Edge or  
Falling Edge of FRCLK/FTCLK to  
Data Valid on FRDEN/FRD/  
FRSOF/FTDEN/FTSOF  
t6  
3
10  
ns  
5
NOTES:  
1) T3 mode.  
2) E3 mode.  
3) FRCLK is a buffered version of either FTCLK or HRCLK and, as such, the duty cycle of FRCLK is  
determined by the source clock.  
4) FTSOF is configured to be an input.  
5) FTSOF is configured to be an output.  
6) In normal mode, FTD (and FTSOF if it is configured as an input) is sampled on the rising edge of FTCLK and  
FRDEN, FRD, FRSOF, and FTDEN (and FTSOF if it is configured as an output) are updated on the rising  
edge of FRCLK or FTCLK.  
7) In inverted mode, FTD (and FTSOF if it is configured as an input) is sampled on the falling edge of FTCLK  
and FRDEN, FRD, FRSOF, and FTDEN (and FTSOF if it is configured as an output) are updated on the  
falling edge of FRCLK or FTCLK.  
Figure 13-3. Framer (T3 and E3) Port AC Timing Diagram  
t1  
t2  
t3  
FRCLK / FTCLK  
Normal Mode  
FRCLK / FTCLK  
Inverted Mode  
t4  
t5  
FTD / FTSOF  
t6  
FRD / FRDEN /  
FRSOF / FTSOF /  
FTDEN  
ls_ac  
113 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
Table 13-4. AC Characteristics—CPU Bus (Multiplexed and Nonmultiplexed)  
(VDD = 3.3V ±5%, TA = 0°C to +70°C for DS3112; TA = -40°C to +85°C for DS3112N.)  
(See Figure 13-4, Figure 13-5, Figure 13-6, Figure 13-7, Figure 13-8, Figure 13-9, Figure 13-10,  
and Figure 13-11.)  
PARAMETER  
Setup Time for CA[7:0] Valid to CCS  
Active  
SYMBOL MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS NOTES  
t1  
t2  
t3  
t4  
t5  
t6  
t7  
t8  
t9  
0
0
ns  
Setup Time for CCS Active to CRD,  
CWR, or CDS Active  
Delay Time from CRD or CDS Active  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
65  
20  
to CD[15:0] Valid  
Hold Time from CRD or CWR or CDS  
Inactive to CCS Inactive  
Hold Time from CCS or CRD or CDS  
0
5
Inactive to CD[15:0] Tri-State  
Wait Time from CWR or CDS Active  
to Latch CD[15:0]  
65  
10  
2
CD[15:0] Setup Time to CWR or CDS  
Inactive  
CD[15:0] Hold Time from CWR or  
CDS Inactive  
CA[7:0] Hold Time from CWR or  
CRD or CDS Inactive  
CRD, CWR, or CDS Inactive Time  
Muxed Address Valid to CALE Falling  
Muxed Address Hold Time  
5
ns  
ns  
t10  
t11  
t12  
t13  
75  
10  
10  
30  
ns  
ns  
ns  
2
2
2
CALE Pulse Width  
Setup Time for CALE High or Muxed  
Address Valid to CCS Active  
t14  
0
ns  
2
NOTES:  
1) In nonmultiplexed bus applications (Figure 13-4), CALE should be tied high.  
2) In multiplexed bus applications (Figure 13-5), CA[7:0] should be tied to CD[7:0] and the falling edge of CALE  
will latch the address.  
114 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Figure 13-4. Intel Read Cycle (Nonmultiplexed)  
t9  
CA[7:0]  
Address Valid  
Data Valid  
CD[15:0]  
CWR  
t5  
t1  
CCS  
t2  
t3  
t4  
t10  
CRD  
Figure 13-5. Intel Write Cycle (Nonmultiplexed)  
t9  
CA[7:0]  
Address Valid  
CD[15:0]  
CRD  
t7  
t8  
t1  
CCS  
t2  
t6  
t4  
t10  
CWR  
115 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Figure 13-6. Motorola Read Cycle (Nonmultiplexed)  
t9  
CA[7:0]  
Address Valid  
Data Valid  
CD[15:0]  
CR/W  
CCS  
t5  
t1  
t2  
t3  
t4  
t10  
CDS  
Figure 13-7. Motorola Write Cycle (Nonmultiplexed)  
t9  
CA[7:0]  
Address Valid  
CD[15:0]  
CR/W  
CCS  
t7 t8  
t1  
t2  
t6  
t4  
t10  
CDS  
116 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Figure 13-8. Intel Read Cycle (Multiplexed)  
t13  
t12  
CALE  
t11  
Address  
CA[7:0]  
Valid  
t14  
Data Valid  
CD[15:0]  
t14  
t5  
CWR  
t1  
CCS  
t2  
t3  
t4  
t10  
CRD  
NOTE: t14 STARTS ON THE OCCURRENCE OF EITHER THE RISING EDGE OF CALE OR A VALID ADDRESS, WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST.  
Figure 13-9. Intel Write Cycle (Multiplexed)  
t13  
t12  
CALE  
t11  
Address  
CA[7:0]  
Valid  
t14  
t14  
CD[15:0]  
t7  
t8  
CRD  
CCS  
CWR  
t1  
t6  
t4  
t2  
t10  
NOTE: t14 STARTS ON THE OCCURRENCE OF EITHER THE RISING EDGE OF CALE OR A VALID ADDRESS, WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST.  
117 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Figure 13-10. Motorola Read Cycle (Multiplexed)  
t13  
t12  
CALE  
t11  
Address  
CA[7:0]  
Valid  
t14  
Data Valid  
CD[15:0]  
CR/W  
CCS  
t14  
t5  
t1  
t4  
t2  
t3  
t10  
CDS  
NOTE: t14 STARTS ON THE OCCURRENCE OF EITHER THE RISING EDGE OF CALE OR A VALID ADDRESS, WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST.  
Figure 13-11. Motorola Write Cycle (Multiplexed)  
t13  
t12  
CALE  
t11  
Address  
CA[7:0]  
Valid  
t14  
t14  
CD[15:0]  
CR/W  
CCS  
t7 t8  
t1  
t6  
t2  
t4  
t10  
CDS  
NOTE: t14 STARTS ON THE OCCURRENCE OF EITHER THE RISING EDGE OF CALE OR A VALID ADDRESS, WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST.  
118 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Table 13-5. AC Characteristics—JTAG Test Port Interface  
(VDD = 3.3V ±5%, TA = 0°C to +70°C for DS3112; TA = -40°C to +85°C for DS3112N.)  
(See Figure 13-12.)  
PARAMETER  
JTCLK Clock Period  
JTCLK Clock Low Time  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
1000  
400  
TYP  
MAX UNITS NOTES  
t1  
t2  
t3  
ns  
ns  
ns  
JTCLK Clock High Time  
400  
JTMS/JTDI Setup Time to the  
Rising Edge of JTCLK  
JTMS/JTDI Hold Time from the  
Rising Edge of JTCLK  
Delay Time from the Falling Edge  
of JTCLK to Data Valid on JTDO  
t4  
t5  
t6  
50  
50  
2
ns  
ns  
50  
ns  
Figure 13-12. JTAG Test Port Interface AC Timing Diagram  
t1  
t2  
t3  
JTCLK  
t4  
t5  
JTMS/JTDI  
JTDO  
t6  
119 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
Table 13-6. AC Characteristics—Reset and Manual Error Counter/Insert  
Signals  
(VDD = 3.3V ±5%, TA = 0°C to +70°C for DS3112; TA = -40°C to +85°C for DS3112N.)  
(See Figure 13-13 .)  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS NOTES  
RST Low Time  
t1  
1000  
ns  
FRMECU/FTMEI High Time  
FRMECU/FTMEI Low Time  
t2  
t3  
50  
ns  
ns  
1000  
Figure 13-13. Reset and Manual Error Counter/Insert AC Timing Diagram  
t1  
RST  
t2  
t3  
FRMECU/  
FTMEI  
120 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
14 APPLICATIONS AND STANDARDS OVERVIEW  
14.1Application Examples  
Figure 14-1 and Figure 14-2 detail two possible applications of the DS3112. Figure 14-1 shows an  
example of a channelized T3/E3 application. It shows the DS3112 being used to multiplex and  
demultiplex a T3/E3 data stream into either 28 T1 data streams or 16 E1 data streams. The demultiplexed  
T1/E1 data streams are fed into the DS21FF42/44 16-channel T1/E1 framer and the DS21FT42 12-  
channel T1 framer devices. The T1/E1 framers locate the frame boundaries and concatenate four T1/E1  
data streams into one 8.192MHz data stream, which is feed into the DS3134 HDLC controller.  
Figure 14-2 shows an example of a dual unchannelized T3/E3 application. In this application, the  
multiplexing capability of the DS3112 is disabled and it is only used as a T3/E3 framer.  
Figure 14-1. Channelized T3/E3 Application  
8.192MHz  
I/F  
DS21FF42/  
DS21FF44  
DS3150  
T3/E3  
Line  
bipolar  
I/F  
16  
Channel  
T1/E1  
T3/E3  
Line  
Interface  
DS3112  
TEMPE  
DS3134  
CHATEAU  
PCI  
Bus  
Framer  
T1/E1  
datastreams  
T3/E3  
Framer &  
M13/  
- or -  
256  
Channel  
HDLC  
8.192MHz  
I/F  
DS21FT42  
E13/  
G747  
Mux  
Controller  
OC-3/  
OC-12/  
OC-48  
Mux  
Optical  
I/F  
NRZ  
I/F  
12  
Channel  
T1  
Framer  
121 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
Figure 14-2. Unchannelized Dual T3/E3 Application  
DS3150  
T3/E3  
Line  
bipolar  
I/F  
DS3112  
TEMPE  
T3/E3  
Line  
Interface  
T3/E3  
Framer &  
M13/  
E13/  
G747  
Mux  
- or -  
Optical  
I/F  
44.2Mbps (T3) or  
34Mbps (E3)  
datastream  
NRZ  
I/F  
OC-3/  
OC-12/  
OC-48  
Mux  
DS3134  
CHATEAU  
PCI  
Bus  
44.2Mbps (T3) or  
34Mbps (E3)  
datastream  
256  
Channel  
HDLC  
DS3150  
T3/E3  
Line  
bipolar  
I/F  
DS3112  
TEMPE  
T3/E3  
Line  
Controller  
Interface  
T3/E3  
Framer &  
M13/  
E13/  
G747  
Mux  
- or -  
Optical  
I/F  
NRZ  
I/F  
OC-3/  
OC-12/  
OC-48  
Mux  
14.2 M13 Basics  
M13 multiplexing is a two-step process of merging 28 T1 lines into a single T3 line. First, four of the T1  
lines are merged into a single T2 rate and then seven T2 rates are merged to form the T3. The first step of  
this process is called a M12 function since it is merging T1 lines into T2. The second step of this process  
is called a M23 function since it is merging T2 lines into a T3. The term M13 implies that both M12 and  
M23 are being performed to map 28 T1 lines into the T3. These two steps are independent and will be  
discussed separately.  
Table 14-1. T Carrier Rates  
NOMINAL  
T CARRIER  
DATA RATE  
LEVEL  
(Mbps)  
T1/DS1  
T2/DS2  
T3/DS3  
1.544  
6.312  
44.736  
122 of 133  
 
DS3112  
14.3 T2 Framing Structure  
To understand the M12 function users must understand T2 framing. The T2 frame structure is made up of  
four subframes called M subframes (Figure 14-3). The four M subframes are transmitted one after  
another (...M1/M2/M3/M4/M1/M2...) to make up the complete T2 M frame data structure. Each M  
subframe is made up of six blocks and each block is made up of 49 bits. The first bit of each block is  
dedicated to overhead and the next 48 bits are the information bits where the T1 data will be placed for  
transport. The definitions of the overhead bits are shown in Table 14-2 and the placements of the  
overhead bits are shown in Figure 14-3.  
Table 14-2. T2 Overhead Bit Assignments  
OVERHEAD BIT  
M Bits  
DESCRIPTION  
The M bits provide the frame alignment pattern for the four M subframes. Like all  
framing patterns, the M bits are fixed to a certain state (M1 = 0/M2 = 1/M3 = 1).  
The F bits provide the frame alignment pattern for the M frame. Like all framing  
patterns, the F bits are fixed to a certain state (F1 = 0/F2 = 1).  
(M1/M2/M3)  
F Bits  
(F1/F2)  
In the M12 application, the C bits are used to indicate when stuffing occurs. If all three  
C Bits within a subframe are set to 1, then stuffing has occurred in the stuff block of  
that subframe. If all three C Bits are set to zero, then no stuffing has occurred. When  
the three C bits are not equal, a majority vote is used to determine the true state. The  
exception to this rule is when the C3 bit is the inverse of C1 and C2. When this occurs,  
it indicates that the T1 signal should be looped back.  
C Bits  
(C1/C2/C3)  
The X bit is used as a Remote Alarm Indication (RAI). It will be set to a zero (X = 0)  
when the T2 framer cannot synchronize. It will be set to a one (X = 1) otherwise.  
X Bit  
14.4 M12 Multiplexing  
The M12 function multiplexes four T1 lines into a single T2 line. Since there are four M subframes in the  
T2 framing structure, it might be concluded that each M subframe supports one T1 line but this is not the  
case. The four T1 lines are bit interleaved into the T2 framing structure. A bit from T1 line #1 is placed  
immediately after the overhead bit, followed by a bit from T1 line #2, which is followed by a bit from T1  
line #3, which is followed by a bit from T1 line #4, and then the process repeats. Since there are 48  
information bits in each block, there are 12 bits from each T1 line in a block. The second and fourth T1  
lines are logically inverted before the bit interleaving occurs.  
The four T1 lines are mapped asynchronously into the T2 data stream. This implies that there is no T1  
framing information passed to the T2 level. The four T1 lines can have independent timing sources and  
they do not need to be timing locked to the T2 clock. To account for differences in timing, bit stuffing is  
used. The last block of each M subframe is the stuff block (Figure 14-3). In each stuff block there is an  
associated stuff bit (Figure 14-4) that will be either an information bit (if the three C bits are decoded to  
be a zero) or a stuff bit (if the three C bits are decoded to be a one). As shown in Figure 14-4 the position  
of the stuff bit varies depending on the M subframe. This is done to allow a stuffing opportunity to occur  
on each T1 line in every T2 M frame. For example, if the C bits in M Subframe 2 were all set to one, then  
the second bit after the F2 overhead bit in the last block would be a stuff bit instead of an information bit.  
123 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
Figure 14-3. T2 M-Frame Structure  
M1 Subframe  
Stuff Block  
48  
48  
48  
48  
48  
48  
M1  
(0)  
Info  
Bits  
C1  
C1  
C1  
C1  
Info  
Bits  
F1  
(0)  
Info  
Bits  
C2  
C2  
C2  
C2  
Info  
Bits  
C3  
C3  
C3  
C3  
Info  
Bits  
F2  
(1)  
Info  
Bits  
M2 Subframe  
Stuff Block  
48  
Info  
Bits  
48  
Info  
Bits  
48  
Info  
Bits  
48  
Info  
Bits  
48  
Info  
Bits  
48  
Info  
Bits  
M2  
(1)  
F1  
(0)  
F2  
(1)  
M3 Subframe  
Stuff Block  
48  
Info  
Bits  
48  
Info  
Bits  
48  
Info  
Bits  
48  
Info  
Bits  
48  
Info  
Bits  
48  
Info  
Bits  
M3  
(1)  
F1  
(0)  
F2  
(1)  
M4 Subframe  
Stuff Block  
48  
Info  
Bits  
48  
Info  
Bits  
48  
Info  
Bits  
48  
Info  
Bits  
48  
Info  
Bits  
48  
Info  
Bits  
X
F1  
(0)  
F2  
(1)  
NOTE: M1 IS TRANSMITTED AND RECEIVED FIRST.  
Figure 14-4. T2 Stuff Block Structure  
M1  
Subframe  
F2 Stuff  
Bit 1  
Info  
Bit 2  
Info  
Bit 3  
Info  
Bit 4  
Info  
Bit 5  
Info  
Bit 6  
Info  
Bit 7  
Info  
Bit 8  
...... Info  
Bit 48  
M2  
Subframe  
F2 Info  
Bit 1  
Stuff  
Bit 2  
Info  
Bit 3  
Info  
Bit 4  
Info  
Bit 5  
Info  
Bit 6  
Info  
Bit 7  
Info  
Bit 8  
...... Info  
Bit 48  
M3  
Subframe  
F2 Info  
Bit 1  
Info  
Bit 2  
Stuff  
Bit 3  
Info  
Bit 4  
Info  
Bit 5  
Info  
Bit 6  
Info  
Bit 7  
Info  
Bit 8  
...... Info  
Bit 48  
M4  
Subframe  
F2 Info  
Bit 1  
Info  
Bit 2  
Info  
Bit 3  
Stuff  
Bit 4  
Info  
Bit 5  
Info  
Bit 6  
Info  
Bit 7  
Info  
Bit 8  
...... Info  
Bit 48  
124 of 133  
 
DS3112  
14.5 T3 Framing Structure  
As with M12, to understand the M23 function requires an understanding of T3 framing. The T3 frame  
structure is very similar to the T2 frame structure; however, it is made up of seven M subframes (see  
Figure 14-5). The seven M subframes are transmitted one after another (...M1/M2/M3/.../  
M6/M7M1/M2...) to make up the complete T3 M frame structure. Each M subframe is made up of eight  
blocks and each block is made up of 85 bits. The first bit of each block is dedicated to overhead and the  
next 84 bits are the information bits where the T2 data will be placed for transport. Table 14-3 shows the  
definitions of the overhead bits, and Figure 14-5 shows the placements of the overhead bits.  
Table 14-3. T3 Overhead Bit Assignments  
OVERHEAD  
DESCRIPTION  
BIT  
M Bits  
(M1/M2/M3)  
F Bits  
The M bits provide the frame alignment pattern for the seven M subframes. Like all framing  
patterns, the M bits are fixed to a certain state (M1 = 0/M2 = 1/M3 = 0).  
The F bits provide the frame alignment pattern for the M frame. Like all framing patterns,  
the F bits are fixed to a certain state (F1 = 1/F2 = 0/F3 = 0/F4 = 1).  
(F1/F2/F3/F4)  
In the M23 application, the C bits are used to indicate when stuffing occurs. If all three C  
bits within a subframe are set to 1, then stuffing has occurred in the stuff block of that  
subframe. If all three C bits are set to zero, then no stuffing has occurred. When the three C  
bits are not equal, a majority vote is used to determine the true state.  
C Bits  
(C1/C2/C3)  
In the C-Bit Parity application, the C bits are defined as shown in Table 14-4.  
The P bits provide parity information for the preceding M frame (not including the M, F, X,  
and C overhead bits). P1 and P2 are always the same value (if they are not the same value,  
this implies a parity error).  
P Bits  
(P1/P2)  
The X bit is used as a Remote Alarm Indication (RAI). It will be set to a zero (X1 = X2 = 0)  
when the T3 framer cannot synchronize or detects AIS. It will be set to a one (X1 = X2 = 1)  
otherwise. The value of the X bits should not change more than once per second. X1 and X2  
are always the same value.  
X Bits  
(X1/X2)  
14.6 M23 Multiplexing  
The M23 function multiplexes seven T2 data streams into a single T3 data stream. The seven T2 data  
streams are bit interleaved into the T3 framing structure. A bit from T2 line #1 is placed immediately  
after the overhead bit in the information bit field, followed by a bit from T2 line #2, and so on. Since  
there are 84 information bits in each block, there are 12 bits from each T2 line in a block.  
The seven T2 lines are mapped asynchronously into the T3 data stream. This implies that there is no T2  
framing information passed to the T3 level. The seven T2 lines can have independent timing sources and  
they do not need to be timing locked to the T3 clock. To account for differences in timing, bit stuffing is  
used. The last block of each M subframe is the stuff block (Figure 14-5). In each stuff block there is an  
associated stuff bit (Figure 14-6) that will be either an information bit (if the three C bits are decoded to  
be zero) or a stuff bit (if the three C bits are decoded to be a one). As shown in Figure 14-6, the position  
of the stuff bit varies depending on the M subframe. This is done to allow a stuffing opportunity to occur  
on each T2 line in every T3 frame. For example, if the C bits in M Subframe 5 were all set to one, then  
the fifth bit after the F4 overhead bit in the last block would be a stuff bit instead of an information bit.  
125 of 133  
 
 
 
DS3112  
14.7 C-Bit Parity Mode  
Unlike the M23 application that uses the C bits for stuffing, the C-Bit Parity mode assumes that a stuff bit  
should be placed at every opportunity and, hence, the C bits can be used for other purposes. Table 14-4  
lists how the C bits are redefined in the C-Bit Parity mode.  
Table 14-4. C-Bit Assignment for C-Bit Parity Mode  
M
C-BIT  
NUMBER  
SUBFRAME  
NUMBER  
1
FUNCTION  
DESCRIPTION  
1
Application ID  
This bit (which is fixed to a value of 1) identifies the T3  
data stream as operating in C-Bit Parity mode.  
2
3
Reserved  
Must be set to one (1).  
Far End Alarm  
and Control  
(FEAC)  
A serial communications channel that contains a repeating  
16-bit codeword that indicates the state of the far-end and  
can control the near-end by invoking loopbacks both on  
the T3 and T1 lines. If no codewords are being sent, the  
channel contains all ones.  
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
C-Bit Parity (CP)  
C-Bit Parity (CP)  
C-Bit Parity (CP)  
FEBE  
FEBE  
FEBE  
All unused bits are set to a one (1).  
All three CP bits are set to the same value as the two P  
bits. If the three CP bits are not equal, a majority vote is  
used to decode the true value.  
All three Far End Block Error (FEBE) bits shall be set to  
one (111) if the local T3 framer did not incur an error in  
either the M bits or F bits nor has it detected a CP parity  
error. The FEBE bits are set to any value except 111 when  
an error is detected in the M bits or F bits or if a CP parity  
error is detected. During an LOF event, these bits are set  
to 000.  
5
1
2
3
Data Link  
Data Link  
Data Link  
These three C bits make up a 28.2kbps HDLC (LAPD)  
maintenance data link over which three 76 octet messages  
are sent from the local end to the remote end once a  
second.  
6
7
1
2
3
1
2
3
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Must be set to 1.  
Must be set to 1.  
Must be set to 1.  
Must be set to 1.  
Must be set to 1.  
Must be set to 1.  
126 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
Figure 14-5. T3 M-Frame Structure  
M1 Subframe  
Stuff Block  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
X1 Info F1 Info C1 Info F2 Info C2 Info F3 Info C3 Info F4 Info  
Bits (1) Bits  
Bits (0) Bits  
Bits (0) Bits  
Bits (1) Bits  
M2 Subframe  
Stuff Block  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
X2 Info F1 Info C1 Info F2 Info C2 Info F3 Info C3 Info F4 Info  
Bits (1) Bits  
Bits (0) Bits  
Bits (0) Bits  
Bits (1) Bits  
M3 Subframe  
Stuff Block  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
P1 Info F1 Info C1 Info F2 Info C2 Info F3 Info C3 Info F4 Info  
Bits (1) Bits  
Bits (0) Bits  
Bits (0) Bits  
Bits (1) Bits  
M4 Subframe  
Stuff Block  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
P2 Info F1 Info C1 Info F2 Info C2 Info F3 Info C3 Info F4 Info  
Bits (1) Bits  
Bits (0) Bits  
Bits (0) Bits  
Bits (1) Bits  
M5 Subframe  
Stuff Block  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
M1 Info F1 Info C1 Info F2 Info C2 Info F3 Info C3 Info F4 Info  
(0) Bits (1) Bits  
Bits (0) Bits  
Bits (0) Bits  
Bits (1) Bits  
M6 Subframe  
Stuff Block  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
M2 Info F1 Info C1 Info F2 Info C2 Info F3 Info C3 Info F4 Info  
(1) Bits (1) Bits  
Bits (0) Bits  
Bits (0) Bits  
Bits (1) Bits  
M7 Subframe  
Stuff Block  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
M3 Info F1 Info C1 Info F2 Info C2 Info F3 Info C3 Info F4 Info  
(0) Bits (1) Bits  
Bits (0) Bits  
Bits (0) Bits  
Bits (1) Bits  
NOTE: X1 IS TRANSMITTED AND RECEIVED FIRST.  
127 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Figure 14-6. T3 Stuff Block Structure  
M1  
Subframe  
F4 Stuff  
Bit 1  
Info  
Bit 2  
Info  
Bit 3  
Info  
Bit 4  
Info  
Bit 5  
Info  
Bit 6  
Info  
Bit 7  
Info  
Bit 8  
...... Info  
Bit 84  
M2  
Subframe  
F4 Info  
Bit 1  
Stuff  
Bit 2  
Info  
Bit 3  
Info  
Bit 4  
Info  
Bit 5  
Info  
Bit 6  
Info  
Bit 7  
Info  
Bit 8  
...... Info  
Bit 84  
M3  
Subframe  
F4 Info  
Bit 1  
Info  
Bit 2  
Stuff  
Bit 3  
Info  
Bit 4  
Info  
Bit 5  
Info  
Bit 6  
Info  
Bit 7  
Info  
Bit 8  
...... Info  
Bit 84  
M4  
Subframe  
F4 Info  
Bit 1  
Info  
Bit 2  
Info  
Bit 3  
Stuff  
Bit 4  
Info  
Bit 5  
Info  
Bit 6  
Info  
Bit 7  
Info  
Bit 8  
...... Info  
Bit 84  
M5  
Subframe  
F4 Info  
Bit 1  
Info  
Bit 2  
Info  
Bit 3  
Info  
Bit 4  
Stuff  
Bit 5  
Info  
Bit 6  
Info  
Bit 7  
Info  
Bit 8  
...... Info  
Bit 84  
M6  
Subframe  
F4 Info  
Bit 1  
Info  
Bit 2  
Info  
Bit 3  
Info  
Bit 4  
Info  
Bit 5  
Stuff  
Bit 6  
Info  
Bit 7  
Info  
Bit 8  
...... Info  
Bit 84  
M7  
Subframe  
F4 Info  
Bit 1  
Info  
Bit 2  
Info  
Bit 3  
Info  
Bit 4  
Info  
Bit 5  
Info  
Bit 6  
Stuff  
Bit 7  
Info  
Bit 8  
...... Info  
Bit 84  
14.8 E13 Basics  
E13 multiplexing is a two-step process of merging 16 E1 lines into a single E3 line. First, four of the E1  
lines are merged into a single E2 rate and then four E2 rates are merged to form the E3. The first step of  
this process is called a E12 function since it is merging E1 lines into E2. The second step of this process  
is called a E23 function since it is merging E2 lines into a E3. The term E13 implies that both E12 and  
E23 are being performed to map 16 E1 lines into the E3. These two steps are independent and will be  
discussed separately.  
Table 14-5. E Carrier Rates  
E CARRIER  
NOMINAL DATA  
RATE (Mbps)  
2.048  
LEVEL  
E1  
E2  
8.448  
E3  
34.368  
128 of 133  
 
DS3112  
14.9E2 Framing Structure and E12 Multiplexing  
The E2 frame structure is made up of four 212-bit sets (Figure 14-7). The four sets are transmitted one  
after another (...Set1/Set2/Set3/Set4/Set1...) to make up the complete E2 frame structure. The Frame  
Alignment Signal (FAS) is placed in the first 10 bits of Set 1 and is followed by the Remote Alarm  
Indication (RAI) bit and a National Bit (Sn). The remainder of Set 1 is filled with bits from the four  
tributaries. The four tributaries are bit interleaved starting with a bit from Tributary 1 immediately after  
the Sn bit. The first four bits of Sets 2, 3, and 4 are the Justification Control Bits. Bits 5 to 8 of Set 4 are  
the Stuffing Bits. The Justification Control bits control when data will be stuffed into the Stuffing Bit  
positions. When a majority of the three Justification Control Bits from a particular tributary is set to zero,  
the Stuffing Bit position will be used for tributary data. When the Justification Control Bits are majority  
decoded to be one, the Stuffing Bit will not be used for tributary data.  
14.10E3 Framing Structure and E23 Multiplexing  
The E3 frame structure and the E23 multiplexing scheme are almost identical to the E2 framing structure  
and the E12 multiplexing scheme. The E3 frame structure is made up of four 384-bit sets (Figure 14-8).  
The four sets are transmitted one after another (...Set1/Set2/Set3/Set4/Set1...) to make up the complete E3  
frame structure. The Frame Alignment Signal (FAS) is placed in the first 10 bits of Set 1 and is followed  
by the Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) bit and a National Bit (Sn). The remainder of Set 1 is filled with  
bits from the four tributaries. The four tributaries are bit interleaved starting with a bit from Tributary 1  
immediately after the Sn bit. The first four bits of Sets 2, 3, and 4 are the Justification Control Bits. Bits 5  
to 8 of Set 4 are the Stuffing Bits. The Justification Control bits control when data will be stuffed into the  
Stuffing Bit positions. When a majority of the three Justification Control Bits from a particular tributary  
is set to zero, the Stuffing Bit position will be used for tributary data. When the Justification Control Bits  
are majority decoded to be one, the Stuffing Bit will not be used for tributary data.  
129 of 133  
 
DS3112  
Figure 14-7. E2 Frame Structure  
Set 1  
Bit 1  
Bit 212  
FAS (1111010000) RAI  
Sn  
b11  
b21  
b31  
b41  
b12 ...bits from the tributaries...  
Set 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 212  
c11  
c21  
c22  
c23  
c31  
c32  
c33  
c41  
c42  
c43  
...bits from the tributaries...  
...bits from the tributaries...  
Set 3  
Bit 1  
c12  
Bit 212  
Bit 212  
Set 4  
Bit 1  
c13  
s1  
s2  
s3  
s4  
...bits from the tributaries...  
NOTE 1:  
NOTE 2:  
NOTE 3:  
NOTE 4:  
BIT 1 OF SET 1 IS TRANSMITTED FIRST.  
BJI  
CJI  
SJ  
TRIBUTARY BITS  
JUSTIFICATION CONTROL BITS  
STUFFING BITS  
J = TRIBUTARY NUMBER I = BIT NUMBER  
J = TRIBUTARY NUMBER I = CONTROL BIT NUMBER  
J = TRIBUTARY NUMBER  
Figure 14-8. E3 Frame Structure  
Set 1  
Bit 1  
Bit 384  
FAS (1111010000) RAI  
Sn  
b11  
b21  
b31  
b41  
b12  
...bits from the tributaries...  
Set 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 384  
c11  
c21  
c22  
c22  
c31  
c32  
c32  
c41  
c42  
c42  
...bits from the tributaries...  
...bits from the tributaries...  
Set 3  
Bit 1  
c12  
Bit 384  
Bit 384  
Set 4  
Bit 1  
c12  
s1  
s2  
s3  
s4  
...bits from the tributaries...  
NOTE 1:  
NOTE 2:  
NOTE 3:  
NOTE 4:  
BIT 1 OF SET 1 IS TRANSMITTED FIRST.  
BJI  
CJI  
SJ  
TRIBUTARY BITS  
JUSTIFICATION CONTROL BITS  
STUFFING BITS  
J = TRIBUTARY NUMBER I = BIT NUMBER  
J = TRIBUTARY NUMBER I = CONTROL STUFFING BIT NUMBER  
J = TRIBUTARY NUMBER  
130 of 133  
 
DS3112  
14.11G.747 Basics  
G.747 multiplexing is a mixture of T3 and E1. It is a two-step process of merging 21 E1 lines into a  
single T3 line. First, three of the E1 lines are merged into a single T2 rate and then seven T2 rates are  
merged to form the T3 just like the normal T2 to T3 multiplexing scheme. Once the three E1 lines have  
been multiplexed together, the resultant 6.312Mbps data stream is treated just like a T2 data stream that  
contains four T1 lines. We will only discuss the G.747 multiplexing scheme in this section. See Section  
14.6 for details on the T2 to T3 multiplexing scheme (e.g., M23) and the T3 framing structure.  
Table 14-6. G.747 Carrier Rates  
T OR E  
NOMINAL DATA  
CARRIER  
RATE (Mbps)  
LEVEL  
E1  
T2  
T3  
2.048  
6.312  
44.736  
131 of 133  
 
DS3112  
14.12G.747 Framing Structure and E12 Multiplexing  
The G.747 frame structure is made up of five 168-bit sets (Figure 14-9). The five sets are transmitted one  
after another (...Set1/Set2/Set3/Set4/Set5/Set1...) to make up the complete G.747 frame structure. The  
Frame Alignment Signal (FAS) is placed in the first 9 bits of Set 1. Set 2 contains the Remote Alarm  
Indication (RAI) bit and a Parity Bit (PAR) as well as a reserved bit, which is fixed to a one. The PAR bit  
will be set to a one when there are odd numbers of ones from the tributaries in the preceding frame and it  
will be set to a zero when there is an even number of ones. The parity calculation does not include the  
FAS, RAI, reserved bit, or Justification Control Bits. The three tributaries are bit interleaved starting with  
a bit from Tributary 1 immediately after the FAS in Set 1. The first three bits of Sets 3, 4, and 5 are the  
Justification Control Bits. Bits 4 to 6 of Set 5 are the Stuffing Bits. The Justification Control bits control  
when data will be stuffed into the Stuffing Bit positions. When a majority of the three Justification  
Control Bits from a particular tributary is set to zero, the Stuffing Bit position will be used for tributary  
data. When the Justification Control Bits are majority decoded to be one, the Stuffing Bit will not be used  
for tributary data.  
Figure 14-9. G.747 Frame Structure  
Set 1  
Bit 1  
FAS (111010000)  
Bit 168  
b11  
b21  
b31  
b12  
b22  
b32  
b13 ...bits from the tributaries...  
Set 2  
Bit 1  
RAI  
Bit 168  
PAR  
c21  
1
...bits from the tributaries...  
...bits from the tributaries...  
...bits from the tributaries...  
Set 3  
Bit 1  
c11  
Bit 168  
Bit 168  
Bit 168  
c31  
c32  
c33  
Set 4  
Bit 1  
c12  
c22  
Set 5  
Bit 1  
c13  
c23  
s1  
s2  
s3  
...bits from the tributaries...  
NOTE 1:  
NOTE 2:  
NOTE 3:  
NOTE 4:  
BIT 1 OF SET 1 IS TRANSMITTED FIRST.  
BJI  
CJI  
SJ  
TRIBUTARY BITS  
JUSTIFICATION CONTROL BITS  
STUFFING BITS  
J = TRIBUTARY NUMBER I = BIT NUMBER  
J = TRIBUTARY NUMBER I = CONTROL STUFFING BIT NUMBER  
J = TRIBUTARY NUMBER  
132 of 133  
 
 
DS3112  
15 PACKAGE INFORMATION  
(The package drawing(s) in this data sheet may not reflect the most current specifications. The package number provided for  
each package is a link to the latest package outline information.)  
15.1 256-Ball PBGA (56-G6002-001)  
133 of 133  
Maxim/Dallas Semiconductor cannot assume responsibility for use of any circuitry other than circuitry entirely embodied in a Maxim/Dallas Semiconductor product.  
No circuit patent licenses are implied. Maxim/Dallas Semiconductor reserves the right to change the circuitry and specifications without notice at any time.  
Maxim Integrated Products, 120 San Gabriel Drive, Sunnyvale, CA 94086 408-737-7600  
© 2006 Maxim Integrated Products  
The Maxim logo is a registered trademark of Maxim Integrated Products, Inc. The Dallas logo is a registered trademark of Dallas Semiconductor Corporation.  
 

相关型号:

SI9130DB

5- and 3.3-V Step-Down Synchronous Converters

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9135LG-T1

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9135LG-T1-E3

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9135_11

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9136_11

Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9130CG-T1-E3

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9130LG-T1-E3

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9130_11

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9137

Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile Applications

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9137DB

Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile Applications

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9137LG

Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile Applications

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9122E

500-kHz Half-Bridge DC/DC Controller with Integrated Secondary Synchronous Rectification Drivers

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY